1 #LyX 2.1 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
7 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
9 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
10 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
11 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
12 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
13 % the documentation team
14 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
16 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
17 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
19 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
20 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
22 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
24 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
25 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
27 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
28 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
29 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
30 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
32 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
36 % define a short command for \textvisiblespace
37 \newcommand{\spce}{\textvisiblespace}
39 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
40 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
42 % for customized page headers/footers
43 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
45 % change header rule width
46 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
48 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
49 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
50 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
52 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
54 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
55 \use_default_options false
60 \maintain_unincluded_children false
62 \language_package default
67 \font_typewriter default
69 \font_default_family default
70 \use_non_tex_fonts false
76 \default_output_format default
78 \bibtex_command bibtex
79 \index_command default
83 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
84 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
88 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
89 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
90 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
95 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
96 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
99 \use_package amsmath 1
100 \use_package amssymb 1
101 \use_package cancel 0
103 \use_package mathdots 1
104 \use_package mathtools 0
105 \use_package mhchem 1
106 \use_package stackrel 0
107 \use_package stmaryrd 0
108 \use_package undertilde 0
110 \cite_engine_type default
114 \paperorientation portrait
118 \notefontcolor #0000ff
135 \paragraph_separation indent
136 \paragraph_indentation default
137 \quotes_language english
140 \paperpagestyle default
141 \tracking_changes false
142 \output_changes false
159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
161 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
162 send them to the LyX Documentation mailing list:
163 \begin_inset CommandInset href
165 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
176 \begin_inset Newline newline
180 \begin_inset Newline newline
184 \begin_inset Note Note
187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
188 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
189 \begin_inset Newline newline
194 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
202 \begin_layout Standard
203 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
204 LatexCommand tableofcontents
211 \begin_layout Chapter
215 \begin_layout Section
219 \begin_layout Standard
220 LyX is a document preparation system.
221 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar \-
222 scripts, publishable books, business
223 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
224 It is unlike most other
225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
232 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
234 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
247 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
250 pt type, left justified, 5
251 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
259 LyX takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
263 \begin_layout Standard
264 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
269 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
273 \begin_layout Standard
278 manual describes several things in addition to LyX's philosophy: most important
279 ly, the format of all of the manuals.
280 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
281 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
287 manual describes that, too.
290 \begin_layout Section
294 \begin_layout Standard
295 Like most applications, LyX has the familiar menu bar across the top of
297 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
298 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
302 \begin_layout Standard
303 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
304 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
305 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
307 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
308 only a vertical scrollbar.
309 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
310 The first case is large images.
311 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
312 image and use the option
318 LaTeX and LyX options
321 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
323 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
324 this doesn't work for equations yet.
327 \begin_layout Standard
328 For a brief description of all LyX menus and toolbar buttons, have a look
334 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
336 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
343 \begin_layout Section
347 \begin_layout Standard
348 The help system consists of the LyX manuals.
349 You can read all of the manuals from inside LyX.
350 Just select the manual you want to read from the
357 \begin_layout Section
359 \begin_inset CommandInset label
361 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
368 \begin_layout Standard
369 Almost all features of LyX can be configured via the menu
371 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
375 \begin_inset Index idx
378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
384 LyX is able to inspect your system to see what programs, LaTeX document
385 classes and LaTeX packages are available.
386 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
388 Although this configuration has already been done when LyX was installed
389 on your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
390 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
394 \begin_inset space \space{}
397 new LaTeX classes, and which are not seen by LyX.
398 To force LyX to re-inspect your system, you should use
400 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
404 \begin_inset Index idx
407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
408 Reconfiguration of LyX
413 You should then restart LyX to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
416 \begin_layout Section
418 \begin_inset CommandInset label
420 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
427 \begin_layout Standard
428 You can edit documents in LyX without having LaTeX installed, but you will
429 not be able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it
431 However, some LyX documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
432 PDFs and the like, and every LyX document can always be output as plain
436 \begin_layout Standard
437 Some document classes may depend upon specific LaTeX or DocBook classes
439 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
440 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
443 \begin_layout Standard
444 The LaTeX packages that LyX has found on your system are listed in a file
445 you can view from the menu
447 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
466 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
467 reconfigure LyX (menu
469 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
473 \begin_inset Note Note
476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
477 The two braces in the TeX Code box prevent that the term
478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
485 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
486 More about TeX Code is described in section
491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
493 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
497 , the printout of proper names like LaTeX is explained in section
502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
504 reference "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
514 \begin_inset Index idx
517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
518 Reconfiguration of LyX
523 See section 5.1 of the
527 manual for more information on installing additional LaTeX packages.
530 \begin_layout Chapter
534 \begin_layout Section
535 Basic File Operations
536 \begin_inset Index idx
539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
548 \begin_layout Standard
553 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
554 in addition to some more advanced operations:
557 \begin_layout Itemize
569 \begin_layout Itemize
583 \begin_layout Itemize
595 \begin_layout Itemize
601 \begin_layout Itemize
613 \begin_layout Itemize
623 \begin_layout Itemize
637 \begin_layout Itemize
647 \begin_layout Itemize
653 \begin_layout Itemize
659 \begin_layout Itemize
665 arg "dialog-show print"
671 \begin_layout Itemize
677 \begin_layout Standard
678 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
679 a few minor differences.
682 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
693 command lists the available templates.
694 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
695 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
696 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
698 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
704 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
711 \begin_layout Standard
712 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
744 Unless you tell LyX to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank
745 space is just that — a big, blank space.
753 \begin_layout Standard
774 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
779 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
781 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar \@.
799 will reload the document from disk.
800 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
801 and want to restore it to the last save.
810 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
811 them as your changes.
814 \begin_layout Section
815 Basic Editing Features
816 \begin_inset Index idx
819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
826 \begin_inset CommandInset label
828 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
835 \begin_layout Standard
836 Like most modern word processors, LyX can perform cut and paste operations
837 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
838 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
839 The next four sections cover the basic LyX editing features and how to
841 We will start with cut and paste.
844 \begin_layout Standard
845 As you might expect, the
849 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
850 various other editing features.
851 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
855 \begin_layout Itemize
869 \begin_layout Itemize
883 \begin_layout Itemize
897 \begin_layout Itemize
907 \begin_layout Itemize
917 \begin_layout Itemize
933 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
939 \begin_layout Standard
940 The first three are self-explanatory.
942 \begin_inset Index idx
945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
951 You can also copy text between LyX and other programs by cut, copy and paste.
960 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
963 \begin_layout Standard
966 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
971 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
977 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
986 will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
988 A new paragraph is started when there is a blank line in the file.
997 , the text is inserted as Paragraphs, where the line breaks of the text
998 will start a new paragraph.
1001 \begin_layout Standard
1002 \begin_inset Index idx
1005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1012 \begin_inset Index idx
1015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1023 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1025 \begin_inset space ~
1029 \begin_inset space ~
1037 \begin_inset space ~
1041 \begin_inset space ~
1047 Once you have found a word or expression, LyX selects it.
1052 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1055 \begin_inset space ~
1064 \begin_inset space ~
1069 button to skip the current word.
1073 \begin_inset space ~
1078 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1082 \begin_inset space ~
1087 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1089 If the toggle is set, searching for
1090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1101 will not match the word
1102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1116 Match whole words only
1118 option can be used to force LyX to only find complete words, e.
1119 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1147 LyX offers also an advanced
1150 \begin_inset space ~
1154 \begin_inset space ~
1159 feature that is described in sec.
1160 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1164 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1166 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1173 \begin_layout Standard
1174 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1175 \begin_inset space \space{}
1179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1187 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1189 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1194 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1201 \begin_layout Standard
1202 The content of an inset is selected using the shortcut
1205 arg "inset-select-all"
1211 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1214 selects the whole document.
1217 \begin_layout Section
1219 \begin_inset Index idx
1222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1229 \begin_inset Index idx
1232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1239 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1241 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1248 \begin_layout Standard
1249 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1250 LyX has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1253 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1256 or the toolbar button
1262 to undo some mistake.
1263 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1265 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1268 or the toolbar button
1275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1282 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1283 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1286 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1289 \begin_layout Standard
1290 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1299 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1300 This is a consequence of the 100
1301 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1304 step undo limit mentioned above.
1307 \begin_layout Standard
1316 work on almost everything in LyX.
1317 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1321 \begin_layout Section
1323 \begin_inset Index idx
1326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1335 \begin_layout Standard
1336 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1339 \begin_layout Enumerate
1344 \begin_layout Itemize
1349 once anywhere in the edit window.
1350 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1354 \begin_layout Enumerate
1359 \begin_layout Itemize
1365 LyX marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1368 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1371 to create a copy of the text in LyX's buffer (and the clipboard).
1374 \begin_layout Itemize
1375 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into LyX using
1377 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1384 \begin_layout Enumerate
1385 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1389 \begin_layout Standard
1390 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1391 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1395 \begin_layout Section
1397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1399 name "sec:Navigating"
1404 \begin_inset Index idx
1407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1416 \begin_layout Standard
1417 LyX offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1420 \begin_layout Itemize
1425 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1426 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1429 \begin_layout Itemize
1430 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1432 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1435 or by the toolbar button
1438 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1444 \begin_layout Itemize
1445 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1447 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1450 and use the same menu to return to them.
1451 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1454 \begin_layout Standard
1458 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1463 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1464 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1466 \begin_inset space ~
1471 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1472 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1473 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1474 your last editing position.
1477 \begin_layout Standard
1482 key the cursor will be vertically centered in LyX's main window.
1485 \begin_layout Subsection
1487 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1489 name "sub:The-Outliner"
1496 \begin_layout Standard
1497 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1498 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1499 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1501 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1507 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1511 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1512 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1516 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1518 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1523 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1527 \begin_layout Standard
1528 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1529 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1530 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1531 dialog and to modify the citation.
1534 \begin_layout Standard
1535 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1537 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1538 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1546 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1549 \begin_layout Standard
1550 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1551 you further to control the display.
1556 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1557 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1563 option keeps it in the current view state.
1564 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1565 \begin_inset space ~
1568 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1569 \begin_inset space ~
1572 3, the subsections of sections
1573 \begin_inset space ~
1576 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1581 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1582 \begin_inset space ~
1586 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1596 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1599 \begin_layout Standard
1601 \begin_inset space \space{}
1605 \begin_inset Graphics
1606 filename ../images/reload.png
1611 \begin_inset space ~
1614 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1615 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1618 \begin_inset space \space{}
1622 \begin_inset Graphics
1623 filename ../images/down.png
1625 groupId toolbarbuttons
1630 \begin_inset space ~
1634 \begin_inset space \space{}
1638 \begin_inset Graphics
1639 filename ../images/up.png
1641 groupId toolbarbuttons
1646 \begin_inset space ~
1649 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1650 So, for example, you can move section
1651 \begin_inset space ~
1655 \begin_inset space ~
1658 2.4 or after section
1659 \begin_inset space ~
1663 LyX will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1665 \begin_inset Graphics
1666 filename ../images/promote.png
1668 groupId toolbarbuttons
1673 \begin_inset Graphics
1674 filename ../images/demote.png
1676 groupId toolbarbuttons
1680 (or the corresponding key bindings
1688 ) you can change the level of sections.
1689 So you can for example make section
1690 \begin_inset space ~
1694 \begin_inset space ~
1698 \begin_inset space ~
1704 \begin_layout Section
1705 Input/Word Completion
1706 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1708 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1713 \begin_inset Index idx
1716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1723 \begin_inset Index idx
1726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1757 \begin_layout Standard
1758 LyX provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
1760 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
1761 is used to propose completions.
1764 \begin_layout Standard
1765 Input completion can be activated in the LyX preferences (menu
1767 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1772 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1779 \begin_inset space ~
1783 \begin_inset space ~
1788 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
1792 \begin_inset space ~
1797 the completions are always shown in a popup.
1798 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
1802 \begin_inset space ~
1808 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
1809 popup completion and choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
1812 \begin_layout Standard
1813 LyX displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there
1814 are completions available.
1819 key to accept a proposed completion.
1820 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
1821 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
1822 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
1829 \begin_layout Standard
1830 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
1831 ing options for text.
1832 The special math option
1836 enables characters to be composed.
1837 If, for example, you want to insert the character
1838 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
1841 , you can then input the characters
1842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1853 to a formula to get it.
1854 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
1855 of the math toolbar.
1856 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
1860 that is in LyX's installation folder.
1861 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
1870 \begin_layout Section
1872 \begin_inset Index idx
1875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1882 \begin_inset Index idx
1885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1914 \begin_inset Index idx
1917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1948 \begin_layout Standard
1949 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
1962 , which can be changed in the LyX preferences under
1964 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1968 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
1969 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1975 reference "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
1982 \begin_layout Standard
1986 \begin_inset space ~
1994 \begin_inset space ~
2015 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2019 \begin_layout Labeling
2020 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2024 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2025 LatexCommand nomenclature
2027 description "Tabulator key"
2033 There is no such thing as a tab stop in LyX.
2034 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2035 \begin_inset space ~
2039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2041 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2048 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2052 , especially section
2053 \begin_inset space ~
2057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2059 reference "sub:Lists"
2065 If you are still confused, look in the
2070 \begin_inset Newline newline
2077 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2078 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2082 \begin_layout Labeling
2083 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2087 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2088 LatexCommand nomenclature
2090 description "Escape key"
2097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2104 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2105 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2108 \begin_layout Labeling
2109 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2115 \begin_inset space ~
2119 \begin_inset space ~
2126 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2127 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2131 \begin_layout Standard
2132 There are three modifier keys:
2135 \begin_layout Labeling
2136 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2154 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2155 LatexCommand nomenclature
2157 description "Control key"
2161 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2162 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2166 \begin_layout Itemize
2175 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2178 \begin_layout Itemize
2187 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2190 \begin_layout Itemize
2199 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2203 \begin_layout Labeling
2204 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2222 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2223 LatexCommand nomenclature
2225 description "Shift key"
2229 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2230 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2233 \begin_layout Labeling
2234 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2252 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2253 LatexCommand nomenclature
2255 description "Alt or Meta key"
2259 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2260 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2261 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2267 \begin_inset Newline newline
2270 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2272 menu accelerator keys
2275 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2276 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2280 \begin_layout Standard
2281 For example, the sequence
2282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2288 \begin_inset space ~
2292 \begin_inset space ~
2298 \begin_inset space ~
2306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2325 \begin_inset space ~
2331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2341 \begin_layout Standard
2346 manual lists all other things bound to the
2354 \begin_layout Standard
2355 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2356 LyX, because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar
2357 at the bottom of LyX's main window which describes the name of the action
2358 you have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2359 The LyX menus also list the defined key bindings.
2360 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2361 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2363 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2379 followed by a capital
2386 \begin_layout Chapter
2388 \begin_inset Index idx
2391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2400 \begin_layout Section
2402 \begin_inset Index idx
2405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2414 \begin_layout Subsection
2418 \begin_layout Standard
2419 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2420 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2421 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2422 numbering schemes, and so on.
2423 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2424 and format the title of your document differently.
2427 \begin_layout Standard
2432 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2433 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2434 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2435 If you don't choose a document class, LyX picks one for you by default.
2436 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2439 \begin_layout Subsection
2441 \begin_inset Index idx
2444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2451 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2453 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2460 \begin_layout Standard
2461 You can select a class using the
2463 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2464 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2468 \begin_inset Index idx
2471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2478 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2482 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2486 \begin_layout Standard
2487 There are four standard document classes in LyX.
2491 \begin_layout Description
2492 Article for basic articles
2495 \begin_layout Description
2496 Report for basic reports
2499 \begin_layout Description
2500 Book for writing a book
2503 \begin_layout Description
2504 Letter for US-style letters
2507 \begin_layout Standard
2508 There are also some non-standard classes, which LyX only uses if you have
2509 installed the corresponding LaTeX class files, though most LaTeX distributions
2510 will include many of these.
2511 Here are some of the classes.
2512 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2514 Special Document Classes
2523 \begin_layout Description
2524 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2527 \begin_layout Description
2528 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2532 \begin_layout Description
2533 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2537 \begin_layout Description
2538 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2539 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2540 There are three article layouts available.
2541 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2542 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2543 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2544 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2549 sequential numbering
2550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2553 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2554 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2555 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2556 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2559 \begin_layout Description
2560 Beamer Layout for presentations
2563 \begin_layout Description
2564 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2565 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2569 \begin_layout Description
2570 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2573 \begin_layout Description
2575 \begin_inset space ~
2578 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2581 \begin_layout Description
2582 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2585 \begin_layout Description
2586 Foils Used to make transparencies
2589 \begin_layout Description
2590 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2591 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2595 \begin_layout Description
2596 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2597 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2600 \begin_layout Description
2601 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2604 \begin_layout Description
2605 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2608 \begin_layout Description
2609 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2610 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2611 (Is used by this document.)
2614 \begin_layout Description
2615 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2618 \begin_layout Description
2619 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2622 \begin_layout Description
2627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2634 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2635 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2637 This class is not completely compatible with all LyX features.
2640 \begin_layout Description
2641 Slides Used to make transparencies
2644 \begin_layout Description
2646 \begin_inset space ~
2649 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2650 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2653 \begin_layout Description
2654 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2657 \begin_layout Standard
2658 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2660 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2666 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2667 of the document classes.
2670 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2674 \begin_layout Standard
2675 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2677 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2678 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2680 \begin_inset Index idx
2683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2700 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2701 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2703 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2706 \begin_layout Standard
2708 LyX includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
2709 and some of them, like
2713 , are highly specialized.
2714 LyX tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
2715 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing
2717 No LaTeX distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2718 by some document class.
2719 There are just too many of them.
2720 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2723 \begin_layout Standard
2724 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
2725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2732 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
2733 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
2734 document class for a new file.
2735 LyX will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
2737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2740 Installing new LaTeX files
2741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2748 manual for information on how to install them.
2749 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
2755 \begin_layout Standard
2756 Although LyX provides support for many different sorts of documents, it
2757 does not include support for every document class people might want to
2759 For example, many universities provide LaTeX class files to be used for
2760 dissertations submitted to those universities.
2761 The LyX team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
2763 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
2767 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
2773 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
2776 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2778 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2785 \begin_inset Index idx
2788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2797 \begin_layout Standard
2798 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
2799 chosen document class.
2800 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
2801 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
2808 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2812 \begin_inset Index idx
2815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2822 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
2826 \begin_layout Standard
2827 Some modules require LaTeX packages or file format converters that are not
2828 always installed by default.
2829 LyX will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
2830 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
2831 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
2832 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since LyX will not be
2833 able to compile the LaTeX file without the missing prerequisites.
2834 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
2835 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure LyX by selecting
2838 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2842 \begin_inset Index idx
2845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2846 Reconfiguration of LyX
2852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2855 Installing new LaTeX files
2856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2863 manual for more information on installing required packages.
2866 \begin_layout Standard
2867 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
2870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2875 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
2876 LyX will advise you about these things.
2884 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2886 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2888 name "sub:Local-Layout"
2893 \begin_inset Index idx
2896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2897 Document ! Local Layout
2905 \begin_layout Standard
2906 Modules are to LyX much as packages are to LaTeX: They are intended to be
2907 used in a variety of different documents.
2908 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
2909 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
2910 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
2911 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
2912 You want something that is like a document's own LaTeX preamble.
2913 What you want is LyX's
2914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2930 manual for information on how to use it.
2933 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2937 \begin_layout Standard
2938 Each class has a default set of options.
2939 Here's a quick table describing them:
2942 \begin_layout Standard
2943 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
2949 \begin_layout Standard
2951 \begin_inset Tabular
2952 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
2953 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
2954 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
2955 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
2956 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
2957 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
2958 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
2960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3412 \begin_layout Standard
3413 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3419 \begin_layout Standard
3420 You're probably also wondering what
3421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3425 \begin_inset space ~
3429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3433 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3434 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3439 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3444 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3454 headings, there are also
3462 headings, and so on.
3463 We will describe these headings fully in section
3464 \begin_inset space ~
3468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3470 reference "sub:Headings"
3477 \begin_layout Subsection
3479 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3481 name "sub:Document-Layout"
3486 \begin_inset Index idx
3489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3498 \begin_inset Index idx
3501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3510 \begin_layout Standard
3511 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3513 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3520 \begin_inset space ~
3528 \begin_inset space ~
3533 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3535 This is only necessary if LyX doesn't support special options you want
3536 to use for your document.
3537 To learn more about your favorite LaTeX-class and its options, you have
3541 \begin_layout Standard
3545 \begin_inset space ~
3552 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3558 \begin_inset space ~
3563 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3564 You can choose between the following five options:
3567 \begin_layout Labeling
3568 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3573 Use default page style of current class.
3576 \begin_layout Labeling
3577 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3582 No page numbers or headings.
3585 \begin_layout Labeling
3586 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3594 \begin_layout Labeling
3595 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3600 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3601 Whether LyX uses the current chapter or the current section depends on
3602 the maximum sectioning level of the class.
3605 \begin_layout Labeling
3606 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3611 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3612 have the LaTeX-package
3617 \begin_inset Index idx
3620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3621 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
3627 How they are defined is explained in section
3628 \begin_inset space ~
3632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3634 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3641 \begin_layout Standard
3642 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3643 \begin_inset space ~
3647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3649 reference "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
3656 \begin_layout Subsection
3657 Paper Size and Orientation
3658 \begin_inset Index idx
3661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3662 Document ! Paper size
3668 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3670 name "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3677 \begin_layout Standard
3678 You can find the following options in the menu
3681 \begin_inset space ~
3688 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3694 \begin_inset Index idx
3697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3706 \begin_layout Labeling
3707 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3711 \begin_inset space ~
3716 What size paper to print on.
3721 \begin_layout Itemize
3727 \begin_layout Itemize
3733 \begin_layout Itemize
3739 \begin_layout Itemize
3745 \begin_layout Itemize
3748 US letter, US legal, US executive
3751 \begin_layout Itemize
3757 \begin_layout Itemize
3764 \begin_layout Labeling
3765 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3770 To choose whether to output as
3781 \begin_layout Labeling
3782 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3786 \begin_inset space ~
3791 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
3792 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
3795 \begin_layout Subsection
3797 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3804 \begin_inset Index idx
3807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3814 \begin_inset Index idx
3817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3826 \begin_layout Standard
3827 Paper margins are set in the menu
3829 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3833 \begin_inset Index idx
3836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3845 \begin_layout Standard
3846 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
3847 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
3848 the paper format and the font size into account.
3851 \begin_layout Subsection
3855 \begin_layout Standard
3856 If you change a document class, LyX has to convert
3861 That includes the paragraph environments.
3862 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
3863 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
3864 If this is the case, and you change the document class, LyX will mark the
3865 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
3866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3874 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
3876 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
3877 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
3878 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
3881 \begin_layout Section
3882 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
3883 \begin_inset Index idx
3886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3887 Paragraph ! Indentation
3895 \begin_layout Subsection
3897 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3899 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
3906 \begin_layout Standard
3907 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
3908 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
3911 \begin_layout Standard
3912 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
3913 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
3914 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
3915 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
3919 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
3925 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
3926 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
3927 language than English.
3928 LaTeX takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language
3932 \begin_layout Standard
3933 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
3934 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
3936 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
3937 LyX takes care of that.
3938 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
3940 That way, LyX can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure
3941 figures fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom
3942 of a page, and so on.
3946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3947 LaTeX does this when LyX goes to produce a printable file.
3952 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
3953 LyX gives you the ability globally to change
3957 these pre-coded spacings.
3958 We will explain more later.
3961 \begin_layout Subsection
3962 Paragraph Separation
3963 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3965 name "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
3970 \begin_inset Index idx
3973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3974 Paragraph ! Separation
3982 \begin_layout Standard
3990 \begin_inset space ~
3998 \begin_inset space ~
4005 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4009 \begin_inset Index idx
4012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4018 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4021 \begin_layout Subsection
4025 \begin_layout Standard
4026 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4029 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4031 \begin_inset space ~
4036 dialog and toggle the
4039 \begin_inset space ~
4044 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4047 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4051 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4052 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4056 \begin_layout Standard
4057 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4058 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4061 \begin_layout Subsection
4063 \begin_inset Index idx
4066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4067 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4075 \begin_layout Standard
4078 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4082 \begin_inset Index idx
4085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4094 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4098 \begin_inset space ~
4107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4108 You need to have the LaTeX-package
4113 \begin_inset Index idx
4116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4117 LaTeX-packages ! setspace
4122 installed to use this feature.
4127 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4129 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4131 \begin_inset space ~
4136 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4137 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4140 \begin_layout Section
4141 Paragraph Environments
4142 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4144 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4149 \begin_inset Index idx
4152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4153 Paragraph ! Environments
4159 \begin_inset Index idx
4162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4163 Paragraph environments|(
4171 \begin_layout Subsection
4175 \begin_layout Standard
4176 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4179 \begin_layout Standard
4198 \begin_inset Newline newline
4201 command sequence in LaTeX files.
4202 If you don't know LaTeX, or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4203 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4212 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4215 \begin_layout Standard
4216 A paragraph environment is simply a
4217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4224 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4225 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4226 scheme, labels, and so on.
4227 Additionally, you can
4228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4235 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4236 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4237 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4238 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4240 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4242 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4245 \begin_layout Standard
4246 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4247 \begin_inset Graphics
4248 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4254 at the left end of the toolbar.
4255 LyX will change the environment of the
4259 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4260 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4261 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4265 \begin_layout Standard
4274 create a new paragraph using the
4278 paragraph environment.
4280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4287 because if you are in one of these environments:
4290 \begin_layout Itemize
4296 \begin_layout Itemize
4302 \begin_layout Itemize
4308 \begin_layout Itemize
4314 \begin_layout Itemize
4320 \begin_layout Itemize
4326 \begin_layout Itemize
4332 \begin_layout Standard
4333 LyX keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4337 , rather than resetting it to
4342 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4343 \begin_inset space ~
4347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4349 reference "sec:Nesting"
4356 \begin_layout Subsection
4360 \begin_layout Standard
4361 The default paragraph environment is
4366 It creates a plain paragraph.
4367 If LyX resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4368 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4369 this manual) are in the
4376 \begin_layout Standard
4377 You can nest a paragraph using the
4381 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4389 \begin_layout Subsection
4391 \begin_inset Index idx
4394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4403 \begin_layout Standard
4404 A LaTeX title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the
4406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4413 for thanks or contact information.
4414 For certain types of documents, LaTeX places all of this on a separate
4415 page along with today's date.
4416 For other types of documents, the title
4417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4424 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4428 \begin_layout Standard
4429 LyX provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4443 Here's how you use them:
4446 \begin_layout Itemize
4447 Put the title of your document in the
4454 \begin_layout Itemize
4455 Put the author name in the
4462 \begin_layout Itemize
4463 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4464 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4470 Note that using this environment is optional.
4471 If you don't provide any, LaTeX will automatically insert today's date.
4472 If you don't want a date, use the option
4474 Suppress default date on front page
4478 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4479 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4481 \begin_inset space ~
4489 \begin_layout Standard
4490 You can use footnotes to insert
4491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4498 or contact information.
4501 \begin_layout Subsection
4503 \begin_inset Index idx
4506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4513 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4522 \begin_layout Standard
4523 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4524 LyX takes care of the numbering for you.
4527 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4529 \begin_inset Index idx
4532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4533 Section headings ! Numbered
4541 \begin_layout Standard
4542 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4546 \begin_layout Enumerate
4552 \begin_layout Enumerate
4558 \begin_layout Enumerate
4564 \begin_layout Enumerate
4570 \begin_layout Enumerate
4576 \begin_layout Enumerate
4582 \begin_layout Enumerate
4588 \begin_layout Standard
4589 LyX labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4590 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4591 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4594 \begin_layout Standard
4595 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4596 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4597 You group the book into chapters.
4598 LyX does a similar grouping:
4601 \begin_layout Itemize
4606 is divided into either
4617 \begin_layout Itemize
4629 \begin_layout Itemize
4641 \begin_layout Itemize
4653 \begin_layout Itemize
4665 \begin_layout Itemize
4677 \begin_layout Standard
4678 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4686 Not all document types use the
4690 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
4695 is the top-level heading.
4703 \begin_layout Standard
4708 environment to label a new sub-subsection, LyX labels it with its number,
4709 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
4711 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
4713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4723 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4725 \begin_inset Index idx
4728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4729 Section headings ! Unnumbered
4737 \begin_layout Standard
4738 The unnumbered section headings have a
4739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4746 at the end of their name.
4747 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
4748 the table of contents, see section
4749 \begin_inset space ~
4753 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4762 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4763 Changing the Numbering
4764 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4766 name "sub:Numbering-depth"
4773 \begin_layout Standard
4774 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
4775 in the Table of Contents.
4776 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
4778 Just as certain classes start with
4792 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
4802 This is something you can change.
4805 \begin_layout Standard
4808 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4812 \begin_inset Index idx
4815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4824 \begin_inset space ~
4828 \begin_inset space ~
4833 you will see two counters.
4838 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy LyX numbers a section
4840 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
4844 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4845 Short Titles of Headings
4846 \begin_inset Index idx
4849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4850 Section headings ! Short titles
4856 \begin_inset Argument 1
4859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4866 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4868 name "sec:Short-Titles"
4875 \begin_layout Standard
4876 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
4877 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
4878 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
4879 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
4882 \begin_layout Standard
4883 LaTeX allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
4884 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
4885 avoiding the problem mentioned.
4886 To specify a short title, use the menu
4888 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4890 \begin_inset space ~
4896 This will insert a box labeled
4897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4912 ) which you can use to enter the short title text.
4913 This also works for captions inside floats.
4916 \begin_layout Standard
4917 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
4920 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4924 \begin_layout Standard
4925 The following information applies to all section headings:
4928 \begin_layout Itemize
4929 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
4932 \begin_layout Itemize
4933 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
4936 \begin_layout Itemize
4937 You can only use inline math in these environments.
4940 \begin_layout Itemize
4941 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
4944 \begin_layout Subsection
4945 Quotes and Poetry line spacing
4948 \begin_layout Standard
4949 LyX has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
4963 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
4964 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
4965 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
4966 the text they contain.
4967 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
4975 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
4978 \begin_layout Standard
4979 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
4988 when you start a new paragraph.
4989 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
4993 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
4994 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
4995 have to change back to the
4999 environment yourself.
5002 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5012 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5019 \begin_inset Index idx
5022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5031 \begin_layout Standard
5032 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5033 time for the differences.
5042 are identical except for one difference:
5046 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5055 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5058 \begin_layout Standard
5059 Here's an example of the
5072 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5074 See – no indentation!
5078 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5079 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5080 the other paragraph.
5083 \begin_layout Standard
5084 Here's another example, this time in the
5091 \begin_layout Quotation
5097 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5098 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5099 the first line, then
5103 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5107 you were quoting other text.
5110 \begin_layout Quotation
5111 Here's a new paragraph.
5112 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5113 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5116 \begin_layout Standard
5117 As the examples show,
5121 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5122 They should put quotes in the
5127 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5131 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5134 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5140 \begin_inset Index idx
5143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5152 \begin_inset Index idx
5155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5162 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5171 \begin_layout Standard
5176 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5182 \begin_inset Newline newline
5185 Which I did not rehearse!
5189 It could be much worse.
5190 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5192 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5193 indented a bit more than the first.
5194 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5200 \begin_inset Newline newline
5203 And make things look fine
5204 \begin_inset Newline newline
5210 arg "newline-insert newline"
5216 \begin_layout Standard
5221 does not indent both margins.
5222 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5223 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the
5230 arg "newline-insert newline"
5236 \begin_layout Subsection
5238 \begin_inset Index idx
5241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5248 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5257 \begin_layout Standard
5258 LyX has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5268 environments, LyX labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5277 environments, LyX lets you provide your own label.
5278 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5279 describing some general features of all four of them.
5282 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5286 \begin_layout Standard
5287 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5289 First, LyX treats each paragraph as a list item.
5298 reset the environment to
5302 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5303 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5304 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5308 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
5312 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5319 \begin_layout Standard
5320 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5321 In fact, LyX changes the labels on some list items depending on how it
5323 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5324 you read all of section
5325 \begin_inset space ~
5329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5331 reference "sec:Nesting"
5338 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5344 \begin_inset Index idx
5347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5354 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5363 \begin_layout Standard
5364 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5368 paragraph environment.
5369 It has the following properties:
5372 \begin_layout Itemize
5373 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5377 \begin_layout Itemize
5378 LyX uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5381 \begin_layout Itemize
5382 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5386 \begin_layout Itemize
5387 The items can have any length.
5388 LyX automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5389 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5396 \begin_layout Itemize
5401 environment inside another
5405 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5409 \begin_layout Itemize
5410 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5413 \begin_layout Itemize
5414 LyX always shows the same symbol on screen.
5417 \begin_layout Itemize
5419 \begin_inset space ~
5423 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5425 reference "sec:Nesting"
5429 for a full explanation of nesting.
5433 \begin_layout Standard
5434 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5443 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5446 \begin_layout Standard
5447 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5448 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5451 \begin_layout Itemize
5452 The label for the first level
5456 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5460 \begin_layout Itemize
5461 The label for the second level is a dash.
5465 \begin_layout Itemize
5466 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5470 \begin_layout Itemize
5471 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5475 \begin_layout Itemize
5476 Back out to the third level.
5480 \begin_layout Itemize
5481 Back to the second level.
5485 \begin_layout Itemize
5486 Back to the outermost level.
5489 \begin_layout Standard
5490 These are the default labels for an
5495 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5497 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5500 dialog in the submenu
5505 \begin_inset Index idx
5508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5514 These customizations are not displayed in LyX.
5517 \begin_layout Standard
5518 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5519 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5521 \begin_inset space ~
5525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5527 reference "sec:Nesting"
5534 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5540 \begin_inset Index idx
5543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5550 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5552 name "sec:Enumerate"
5559 \begin_layout Standard
5564 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5565 It has these properties:
5568 \begin_layout Enumerate
5569 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5573 \begin_layout Enumerate
5574 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5578 \begin_layout Enumerate
5579 LyX automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5582 \begin_layout Enumerate
5587 environment resets the counter to one.
5590 \begin_layout Enumerate
5603 \begin_layout Enumerate
5604 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5605 Items can have any length.
5608 \begin_layout Enumerate
5609 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5612 \begin_layout Enumerate
5613 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5616 \begin_layout Enumerate
5617 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5621 \begin_layout Standard
5630 shows the different labels for each item in LyX.
5631 Here is how LyX labels the four different levels in an
5638 \begin_layout Enumerate
5639 The first level of an
5643 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5647 \begin_layout Enumerate
5648 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5652 \begin_layout Enumerate
5653 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5657 \begin_layout Enumerate
5658 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5661 \begin_layout Enumerate
5662 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5667 \begin_layout Enumerate
5668 Back to the third level
5672 \begin_layout Enumerate
5673 Back to the second level.
5677 \begin_layout Enumerate
5678 Back to the outermost level.
5681 \begin_layout Standard
5682 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5686 environment, see section
5687 \begin_inset space ~
5691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5693 reference "sub:Customized-Lists"
5698 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in LyX.
5701 \begin_layout Standard
5702 There is more to nesting
5706 environments than we've stated here.
5707 You should read section
5708 \begin_inset space ~
5712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5714 reference "sec:Nesting"
5718 to learn more about nesting.
5721 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5727 \begin_inset Index idx
5730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5739 \begin_layout Standard
5740 Unlike the previous two environments, the
5744 list has no fixed label.
5745 Instead, LyX uses the first
5746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5753 of the first line as the label.
5757 \begin_layout Description
5758 Example: This is an example of the
5765 \begin_layout Standard
5766 LyX typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
5770 \begin_layout Standard
5772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5779 it is meant that the first usage of the
5783 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
5785 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
5793 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
5798 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5799 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5801 \begin_inset space ~
5807 \begin_inset space ~
5811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5813 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
5817 for more information.) Here is an example:
5820 \begin_layout Description
5822 \begin_inset space ~
5825 Example: This one shows how to use a
5828 \begin_inset space ~
5840 \begin_layout Description
5841 Usage: You should use the
5845 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
5846 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
5848 It's not a good idea to use a
5852 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
5853 You're better off using
5865 paragraphs into them.
5868 \begin_layout Description
5869 Nesting: You can nest
5873 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
5877 \begin_layout Standard
5878 Notice that after the first line, LyX indents subsequent lines, offsetting
5879 them from the first line.
5882 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5884 \begin_inset Index idx
5887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5896 \begin_layout Standard
5901 environment is a LyX extension to LaTeX.
5904 \begin_layout Standard
5913 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
5915 Here are its properties:
5918 \begin_layout Labeling
5919 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5921 \begin_inset space ~
5924 labels LyX uses the first
5925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5932 of each line as the item label.
5937 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
5938 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
5939 space as described above.
5942 \begin_layout Labeling
5943 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5944 margins As you can see, LyX uses different margins for the item label and
5945 the body of the item text.
5946 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
5947 label width plus a little extra space.
5951 \begin_layout Labeling
5952 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5954 \begin_inset space ~
5957 width LyX uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is
5959 If the label width is larger, the label
5960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5967 into the first line.
5968 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
5969 margin of the rest of the item text.
5972 \begin_layout Labeling
5973 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5975 \begin_inset space ~
5978 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
5983 environment has the same left margin.
5984 \begin_inset Newline newline
5987 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
5990 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5992 \begin_inset space ~
5997 dialog (toolbar button
6000 arg "layout-paragraph"
6007 \begin_inset space ~
6012 determines the default label width.
6013 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6022 multiple times instead.
6023 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in LaTeX.
6025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6032 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6035 \begin_inset space ~
6040 every time you alter a label in a
6045 \begin_inset Newline newline
6048 The predefined default width is the length of
6049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6057 \begin_inset space ~
6063 \begin_layout Standard
6068 list the same way as the
6072 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6078 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6082 \begin_layout Standard
6087 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6088 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6090 \begin_inset space ~
6094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6096 reference "sec:Nesting"
6100 to learn about nesting.
6103 \begin_layout Standard
6104 There is yet another feature of the
6108 list: As you can see in the examples, LyX left-justifies the item labels
6110 You can use additional
6114 to change how LyX justifies the item label.
6119 are documented in section
6120 \begin_inset space ~
6124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6126 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
6131 Here are some examples:
6134 \begin_layout Labeling
6135 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6136 Left The default for
6143 \begin_layout Labeling
6144 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6145 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6152 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6155 \begin_layout Labeling
6156 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6157 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6161 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6168 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6171 \begin_layout Subsection
6173 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6175 name "sub:Customized-Lists"
6180 \begin_inset Index idx
6183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6192 \begin_layout Standard
6193 The features described in this section require that the module
6195 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6197 is loaded in the document settings.
6198 The module uses the LaTeX-package
6203 \begin_inset Index idx
6206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6207 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6215 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6216 Custom Enumerate Lists
6217 \begin_inset Index idx
6220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6221 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6229 \begin_layout Standard
6231 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6234 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6237 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6238 There you add the command
6241 \begin_layout Standard
6249 \begin_layout Standard
6250 in TeX Code (shortcut
6260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6261 For more about TeX Code, look at section
6262 \begin_inset space ~
6266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6268 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6281 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6288 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6289 For capital Roman numerals replace
6301 in the command above.
6302 For Arabic numerals use
6310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6317 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6332 \begin_layout Standard
6334 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6342 You can only number 26
6343 \begin_inset space ~
6346 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6354 \begin_layout Standard
6355 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6356 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6359 \begin_layout Standard
6360 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6363 \begin_layout Enumerate
6364 \begin_inset Argument 1
6367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6393 \begin_layout Enumerate
6394 \begin_inset Argument 1
6397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6420 \begin_layout Enumerate
6425 \begin_layout Enumerate
6426 \begin_inset Argument 1
6429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6453 \begin_layout Enumerate
6454 \begin_inset Argument 1
6457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6483 \begin_layout Standard
6484 For this list these commands were used:
6487 \begin_layout Standard
6498 \begin_inset Newline newline
6506 \begin_inset Newline newline
6514 \begin_inset Newline newline
6524 \begin_layout Standard
6531 makes the label emphasized and
6540 \begin_layout Standard
6541 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6549 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6550 lists until you change the definition.
6558 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6560 \begin_inset Index idx
6563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6564 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6572 \begin_layout Standard
6573 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6576 \begin_layout Enumerate
6577 \begin_inset Argument 1
6580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6599 \begin_inset Note Note
6602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6603 goes back to default numbering
6611 \begin_layout Enumerate
6615 \begin_layout Standard
6619 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6623 \begin_layout Standard
6624 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6629 Its numbering appears in blue within LyX to indicate that it is a resumed
6630 list and that the numbering will not be correct in LyX, but in the output.
6633 \begin_layout Standard
6634 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6642 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a LaTeX error.
6650 \begin_layout Standard
6651 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6653 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6654 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6655 of a normal enumeration.
6656 There, insert the command
6659 \begin_layout Standard
6665 \begin_layout Standard
6670 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6674 \begin_layout Enumerate
6678 \begin_layout Enumerate
6682 \begin_layout Standard
6683 Enumeration starting at a given value:
6686 \begin_layout Enumerate
6687 \begin_inset Argument 1
6690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6706 This enumeration starts at 4
6709 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6711 \begin_inset Index idx
6714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6723 \begin_layout Standard
6724 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
6726 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
6729 \begin_layout Itemize
6733 \begin_layout Itemize
6734 with standard spacing
6737 \begin_layout Standard
6738 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
6740 Add there the command
6744 to get no additional list space like in this example:
6747 \begin_layout Itemize
6748 \begin_inset Argument 1
6751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6770 \begin_layout Itemize
6774 \begin_layout Itemize
6778 \begin_layout Standard
6779 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the LaTeX-package
6785 \begin_inset Index idx
6788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6789 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6795 For more information see its documentation,
6796 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
6805 \begin_layout Standard
6806 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
6808 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
6809 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
6810 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
6813 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
6816 \begin_layout Enumerate
6817 \begin_inset Argument 1
6820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6828 parindent, labelsep=2cm
6841 \begin_layout Enumerate
6842 with negative indentation
6845 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6846 Further Customization
6847 \begin_inset Index idx
6850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6851 Lists ! Customization
6859 \begin_layout Standard
6860 You can also change the style of description lists.
6864 \begin_layout Standard
6870 \begin_layout Standard
6871 changes the description label font, the command
6874 \begin_layout Standard
6880 \begin_layout Standard
6881 sets the list style.
6884 \begin_layout Standard
6885 An example where the command
6888 \begin_layout Standard
6893 itshape, style=nextline
6896 \begin_layout Standard
6900 \begin_layout Description
6902 \begin_inset space ~
6906 \begin_inset Argument 1
6909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6915 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
6917 itshape, style=nextline
6927 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
6928 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
6932 \begin_layout Description
6934 \begin_inset space ~
6937 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
6938 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
6939 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
6942 \begin_layout Standard
6943 There are many more commands and features provided by the LaTeX-package
6949 \begin_inset Index idx
6952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6953 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6959 For more information see its documentation
6960 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
6969 \begin_layout Subsection
6971 \begin_inset Index idx
6974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6983 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6991 \begin_inset space ~
6999 \begin_layout Standard
7000 Although LyX has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7008 \begin_inset space ~
7014 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7015 in a specific order, otherwise LaTeX gags on the document.
7016 In contrast, you can use the
7023 \begin_inset space ~
7028 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7029 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7033 \begin_layout Standard
7034 Of course, you're not limited to using
7041 \begin_inset space ~
7050 \begin_inset space ~
7055 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7056 some European academic papers.
7059 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7061 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7063 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7070 \begin_layout Standard
7075 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7076 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7080 \begin_inset space ~
7085 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7086 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7087 Here's an example of each:
7090 \begin_layout Right Address
7092 \begin_inset Newline newline
7096 \begin_inset Newline newline
7100 \begin_inset Newline newline
7103 When is it? What is today?
7106 \begin_layout Standard
7110 \begin_inset space ~
7116 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which LyX sets to
7117 fit the largest block of text on a single line.
7118 Here's an example of the
7125 \begin_layout Address
7127 \begin_inset Newline newline
7130 Where do I send this
7131 \begin_inset Newline newline
7134 Your post office and country
7137 \begin_layout Standard
7138 As you can see, both
7145 \begin_inset space ~
7150 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7155 in either of these environments, LyX resets the nesting depth and sets
7161 This makes sense, since
7169 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7170 Thus, you have to use
7177 arg "newline-insert newline"
7182 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7183 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7185 \begin_inset space ~
7189 \begin_inset space ~
7194 ) to start a new line in an
7201 \begin_inset space ~
7209 \begin_layout Subsection
7213 \begin_layout Standard
7214 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7215 or list of references.
7216 LyX contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7219 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7223 \begin_inset Index idx
7226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7235 \begin_layout Standard
7240 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7241 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7242 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7243 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7257 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7258 The book document classes ignores the
7262 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7266 in a letter document class.
7269 \begin_layout Standard
7274 environment does several things for you.
7275 First, it puts the centered label
7276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7284 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7286 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7287 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7288 the subsequent text.
7289 Well, that's how it will appear on the LyX screen.
7290 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7294 \begin_layout Standard
7295 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7299 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7300 The new paragraph will still be in the
7305 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7306 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7309 \begin_layout Standard
7310 \begin_inset Float figure
7315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7317 \begin_inset Graphics
7318 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7326 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7329 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7331 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7352 \begin_layout Standard
7353 We would love to demonstrate the
7357 environment, but since this document is in the
7358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7365 class, we can't do this.
7366 We inserted it therefore as figure
7367 \begin_inset space ~
7371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7373 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7378 If you have never heard of an
7379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7386 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7389 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7395 \begin_inset Index idx
7398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7405 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7407 name "sub:Biblio_environment"
7414 \begin_layout Standard
7419 environment is used to list references.
7420 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7421 only use it at the end of the document.
7433 \begin_layout Standard
7434 When you first open a
7438 environment, LyX adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7454 depending on the document class.
7455 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7456 Each paragraph of the
7460 environment is a bibliography entry.
7465 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7466 Each new paragraph is still in the
7473 \begin_layout Standard
7474 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7475 by using a BibTeX database.
7476 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of LyX's bibliogra
7477 phy handling, have a look at section
7478 \begin_inset space ~
7482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7484 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7491 \begin_layout Subsection
7495 \begin_inset Index idx
7498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7499 Paragraph ! LyX code
7505 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7514 \begin_layout Standard
7519 environment is another LyX extension.
7520 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7525 key as a fixed whitespace;
7529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7541 \begin_inset space ~
7546 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7551 this is the only case in which you can type multiple whitespaces in LyX.
7552 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7555 arg "newline-insert newline"
7572 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7573 So, when you finish using the
7577 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7578 Also, you can nest the
7582 environment inside of others.
7585 \begin_layout Standard
7586 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7589 \begin_layout Itemize
7593 arg "newline-insert newline"
7596 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7597 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7601 \begin_inset space \space{}
7611 arg "newline-insert newline"
7617 \begin_layout Itemize
7621 arg "newline-insert newline"
7632 \begin_layout Itemize
7637 to begin a new paragraph, then you can use a
7644 \begin_layout Itemize
7648 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
7655 \begin_layout Itemize
7656 You can't have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7657 You must put at least one
7661 in any line you want blank.
7662 Otherwise, LaTeX generates errors.
7665 \begin_layout Itemize
7666 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7670 since that will insert
7675 You get the typewriter double quotes with
7678 arg "self-insert \""
7684 \begin_layout Standard
7688 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7692 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7696 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7700 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7704 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7705 printf("Hello World!
7710 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7714 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7718 \begin_layout Standard
7719 This is just the standard
7720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7731 \begin_layout Standard
7736 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts,
7737 rc-files, and so on.
7738 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
7739 as if you used a typewriter.
7740 \begin_inset Index idx
7743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7744 Paragraph environments|)
7749 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
7752 Program Code Listings
7757 \begin_inset space ~
7765 \begin_layout Section
7766 Nesting Environments
7767 \begin_inset Index idx
7770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7771 Nesting ! Environments
7777 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7786 \begin_layout Subsection
7790 \begin_layout Standard
7791 LyX treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific
7793 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
7795 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
7797 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
7799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7809 \begin_layout Enumerate
7813 \begin_layout Enumerate
7818 \begin_layout Enumerate
7822 \begin_layout Enumerate
7827 \begin_layout Enumerate
7831 \begin_layout Standard
7832 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
7833 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
7835 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7837 \begin_inset space ~
7841 \begin_inset space ~
7849 \begin_inset space ~
7853 \begin_inset space ~
7858 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
7860 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
7863 arg "depth-increment"
7869 arg "depth-decrement"
7883 arg "depth-increment"
7889 arg "depth-decrement"
7893 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
7894 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
7898 \begin_layout Standard
7899 Note that LyX only changes the nesting depth if it can.
7900 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
7901 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
7902 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
7905 \begin_layout Standard
7906 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
7907 In LyX, you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're
7909 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
7912 \begin_layout Subsection
7913 What You Can and Can't Nest
7916 \begin_layout Standard
7917 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
7918 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
7921 \begin_layout Standard
7922 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
7923 than a simple yes or no.
7924 There are three types of paragraph environments:
7927 \begin_layout Itemize
7928 Completely unnestable
7931 \begin_layout Itemize
7932 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
7936 \begin_layout Itemize
7937 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
7941 \begin_layout Standard
7942 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
7943 environments have them:
7946 \begin_layout Description
7947 Unnestable Can't nest them.
7948 Can't nest into them.
7952 \begin_layout Itemize
7958 \begin_layout Itemize
7964 \begin_layout Itemize
7970 \begin_layout Itemize
7976 \begin_layout Itemize
7983 \begin_layout Description
7985 \begin_inset space ~
7988 Nestable You can nest them.
7989 You can nest other things into them.
7993 \begin_layout Itemize
7999 \begin_layout Itemize
8005 \begin_layout Itemize
8011 \begin_layout Itemize
8017 \begin_layout Itemize
8023 \begin_layout Itemize
8029 \begin_layout Itemize
8035 \begin_layout Itemize
8042 \begin_layout Description
8043 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8044 You can't nest anything into them.
8048 \begin_layout Itemize
8054 \begin_layout Itemize
8060 \begin_layout Itemize
8066 \begin_layout Itemize
8072 \begin_layout Itemize
8078 \begin_layout Itemize
8084 \begin_layout Itemize
8090 \begin_layout Itemize
8096 \begin_layout Itemize
8102 \begin_layout Itemize
8108 \begin_layout Itemize
8114 \begin_layout Itemize
8120 \begin_layout Itemize
8126 \begin_layout Itemize
8130 \begin_inset space ~
8136 \begin_layout Itemize
8143 \begin_layout Standard
8144 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8152 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8162 \begin_inset space ~
8165 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8166 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8167 nested section headings violate this.
8175 \begin_layout Subsection
8176 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8177 \begin_inset Index idx
8180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8181 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8189 \begin_layout Standard
8190 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8191 affected by nesting anyhow.
8195 \begin_layout Itemize
8199 \begin_layout Itemize
8203 \begin_layout Itemize
8207 \begin_layout Standard
8209 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8217 Figures and tables in
8221 are not affected by this.
8226 Have a look at section
8227 \begin_inset space ~
8231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8233 reference "sec:Floats"
8237 for more information about
8244 \begin_layout Standard
8245 LyX can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8246 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8250 \begin_layout Standard
8251 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8259 of its own, it behaves just like a
8260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8267 paragraph environment.
8268 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8272 \begin_layout Standard
8273 Here's an example with a table:
8276 \begin_layout Enumerate
8281 \begin_layout Enumerate
8282 This is (a) and it's nested.
8286 \begin_layout Standard
8287 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8293 \begin_layout Standard
8295 \begin_inset Tabular
8296 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8297 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8298 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8299 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8383 \begin_layout Standard
8384 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8391 \begin_layout Enumerate
8393 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8397 \begin_layout Enumerate
8401 \begin_layout Standard
8402 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8405 \begin_layout Enumerate
8410 \begin_layout Enumerate
8411 This is (a) and it's nested.
8415 \begin_layout Standard
8416 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8422 \begin_layout Standard
8424 \begin_inset Tabular
8425 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8426 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8427 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8428 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8512 \begin_layout Standard
8513 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8519 \begin_layout Enumerate
8526 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8529 \begin_layout Enumerate
8533 \begin_layout Standard
8534 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
8538 \begin_layout Standard
8539 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
8541 LyX then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
8544 \begin_layout Enumerate
8549 \begin_layout Enumerate
8550 This is (a) and it's nested.
8553 \begin_layout Standard
8554 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8560 \begin_layout Standard
8562 \begin_inset Tabular
8563 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8564 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8565 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8566 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8651 \begin_layout Standard
8652 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8658 \begin_layout Enumerate
8660 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
8667 \begin_layout Enumerate
8671 \begin_layout Standard
8672 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
8678 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
8679 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
8683 \begin_layout Subsection
8684 Usage and General Features
8687 \begin_layout Standard
8688 Speaking of levels, LyX can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
8690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8697 is the innermost possible depth.
8698 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
8701 \begin_layout Enumerate
8702 level #1 – outermost
8706 \begin_layout Enumerate
8711 \begin_layout Enumerate
8716 \begin_layout Enumerate
8721 \begin_layout Itemize
8726 \begin_layout Itemize
8735 \begin_layout Standard
8736 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
8737 both of them in the example.
8738 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
8748 For example, if we tried to nest another
8753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8760 , we would get errors.
8763 \begin_layout Subsection
8765 \begin_inset Index idx
8768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8777 \begin_layout Standard
8778 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
8779 We have several examples of nested environments.
8780 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
8784 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8785 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
8788 \begin_layout Labeling
8789 \labelwidthstring MMM
8790 #1-a This is the outermost level.
8799 \begin_layout Labeling
8800 \labelwidthstring MMM
8801 #2-a This is level #2.
8802 We created it by using
8805 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8811 arg "depth-increment"
8818 \begin_layout Labeling
8819 \labelwidthstring MMM
8820 #3-a This is level #3.
8821 This time, we just enter
8828 arg "depth-increment"
8832 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
8836 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8842 arg "depth-increment"
8849 \begin_layout Standard
8854 environment, nested inside of
8855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8863 So, it's at level #4.
8864 We did this by entering
8867 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8873 arg "depth-increment"
8876 , then changing the paragraph environment to
8881 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
8897 \begin_layout Standard
8902 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
8905 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8911 \begin_layout Labeling
8912 \labelwidthstring MMM
8913 #4-a This is level #4.
8917 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8920 and changed the paragraph environment back to
8925 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
8929 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
8934 keep nesting things inside
8935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8946 \begin_layout Labeling
8947 \labelwidthstring MMM
8948 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar \ldots{}
8953 \begin_layout Labeling
8954 \labelwidthstring MMM
8955 #6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{}
8956 and this is level #6.
8957 By now, you should know how we made these two.
8961 \begin_layout Labeling
8962 \labelwidthstring MMM
8963 #5-b Back to level #5.
8967 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8973 arg "depth-decrement"
8980 \begin_layout Labeling
8981 \labelwidthstring MMM
8985 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8991 arg "depth-decrement"
8994 , we're back at level #4.
8998 \begin_layout Labeling
8999 \labelwidthstring MMM
9000 #3-b Back to level #3.
9001 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9005 \begin_layout Labeling
9006 \labelwidthstring MMM
9007 #2-b Back to level #2.
9012 \begin_layout Labeling
9013 \labelwidthstring MMM
9014 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9015 After this sentence, we will enter
9019 and change the paragraph environment back to
9026 \begin_layout Standard
9027 We could have also used the
9043 environment in place of the
9048 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9051 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9052 Example 2: Inheritance
9055 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9056 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9059 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9068 arg "depth-increment"
9072 \begin_inset Newline newline
9075 which, we will change to the
9083 \begin_layout Enumerate
9088 environment, at level #2.
9091 \begin_layout Enumerate
9092 Notice how the nested
9096 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9100 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9104 \begin_layout Standard
9105 We ended this example by entering
9110 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9114 and reset the nesting depth by using
9117 arg "depth-decrement"
9123 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9124 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9133 \begin_inset Argument 1
9136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9137 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9145 \begin_layout Enumerate
9146 This is level #1, in an
9150 paragraph environment.
9151 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9155 \begin_layout Enumerate
9160 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9166 arg "depth-increment"
9170 Now, what happens if we nest an
9174 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9175 label be? An asterisk?
9179 \begin_layout Itemize
9189 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9190 So, its label is a bullet.
9191 (We got here by using
9194 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9200 arg "depth-increment"
9203 , then changing the environment to
9211 \begin_layout Itemize
9212 Here's level #4, produced using
9215 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9221 arg "depth-increment"
9225 We will do that again\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9230 \begin_layout Enumerate
9231 \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9233 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9238 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9242 , because we are in the
9250 environment (that is, it is an
9265 \begin_layout Enumerate
9270 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9271 type of numbering does LyX use?
9274 \begin_layout Enumerate
9275 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9278 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9281 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9284 \begin_layout Enumerate
9288 arg "depth-decrement"
9291 to decrease the depth after the next
9294 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9301 \begin_layout Enumerate
9303 Look what type of label LyX is using!
9307 \begin_layout Enumerate
9309 Even though we've changed levels, LyX is still using a lowercase Roman
9310 numeral as the label.Why?
9313 \begin_layout Enumerate
9314 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9323 Notice, however, that LyX
9327 reset the counter for the label.
9331 \begin_layout Enumerate
9335 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9341 arg "depth-decrement"
9344 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9345 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9346 into the twofold-nested
9354 \begin_layout Enumerate
9355 The same thing happens if we do another
9358 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9364 arg "depth-decrement"
9367 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9370 \begin_layout Standard
9371 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9376 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9390 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label LyX uses for
9396 The same rule applies for the
9400 environment, as well.
9403 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9404 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9407 \begin_layout Enumerate
9408 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9409 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9410 the same detail with how we did it.
9419 \begin_layout Standard
9427 arg "depth-increment"
9434 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9435 the example in parentheses someplace.
9436 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9437 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9438 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9442 \begin_layout Enumerate
9447 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9452 Now we will add verse.
9453 \begin_inset Newline newline
9456 It will get much worse.
9457 \begin_inset Newline newline
9467 arg "depth-increment"
9478 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9479 \begin_inset Newline newline
9482 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9483 \begin_inset Newline newline
9489 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9502 \begin_layout Standard
9503 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9509 \begin_layout Standard
9511 \begin_inset Tabular
9512 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9513 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
9514 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9515 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
9558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9604 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9614 arg "depth-increment"
9620 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9630 arg "depth-decrement"
9637 \begin_layout Enumerate
9642 : level #1) This is another item.
9643 Note that selecting a
9647 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
9648 3 times to put the table inside the
9656 \begin_layout Quotation
9657 We're now ending the
9661 list and changing to
9666 We're still at level #1.
9667 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
9668 The next set of paragraphs is a
9669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9676 We will nest both the
9683 \begin_inset space ~
9688 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
9692 for the letter body.
9696 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9699 to preserve the depth.
9700 Remember that you need to use
9703 arg "newline-insert newline"
9706 to create multiple lines inside the
9713 \begin_inset space ~
9723 \begin_layout Right Address
9725 \begin_inset Newline newline
9728 Moosegroin, MT 00100
9729 \begin_inset Newline newline
9735 \begin_layout Address
9737 \begin_inset space ~
9743 \begin_layout Quotation
9744 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
9745 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9748 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
9749 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
9750 a backlog in our orders for methane.
9751 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
9752 as soon as possible.
9753 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
9756 \begin_layout Quotation
9757 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
9758 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
9759 with your order, along with payment.
9762 \begin_layout Quotation
9763 We thank you again for your patience.
9766 \begin_layout Address
9768 \begin_inset Newline newline
9775 \begin_layout Quotation
9776 That ends that example!
9779 \begin_layout Standard
9780 As you can see, nesting environments in LyX gives you a lot of power with
9781 just a few keystrokes.
9782 We could have easily nested an
9803 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
9806 \begin_layout Section
9807 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
9808 \begin_inset Index idx
9811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9820 \begin_layout Standard
9821 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
9822 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, LyX offers
9823 you more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
9824 be broken at the end of a line.
9825 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
9829 \begin_layout Subsection
9831 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9833 name "sub:Protected-Space"
9838 \begin_inset Index idx
9841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9850 \begin_layout Standard
9851 The protected space: It is used to tell LyX (and LaTeX) not to break the
9853 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
9857 Further documentation is given in section
9858 \begin_inset Newline newline
9862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9864 reference "sec:Bibliography"
9872 \begin_layout Standard
9873 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
9874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9888 reference "sec:Bibliography"
9893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9897 A protected space is set with
9899 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
9900 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
9902 \begin_inset space ~
9910 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
9916 \begin_layout Subsection
9918 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9920 name "sub:Horizontal-Space"
9925 \begin_inset Index idx
9928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9929 Spacing ! Horizontal
9937 \begin_layout Standard
9938 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
9940 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
9941 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
9945 The length units are listed in Appendix
9946 \begin_inset space ~
9950 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9952 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
9959 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9961 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9963 name "sub:Inter-word-Space"
9968 \begin_inset Index idx
9971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9980 \begin_layout Standard
9981 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
9982 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
9983 at the ends of sentences.
9984 There is no need to do this as LyX automatically takes care about this.
9985 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
9986 followed by a period; see section
9987 \begin_inset space ~
9991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9993 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
9998 To insert a normal space, select
10000 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10001 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10003 \begin_inset space ~
10011 arg "space-insert normal"
10017 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10019 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10021 name "sub:Thin-Space"
10026 \begin_inset Index idx
10029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10038 \begin_layout Standard
10040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10047 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10056 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10057 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10058 inside abbreviations:
10061 \begin_layout Quote
10063 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10067 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10070 \begin_layout Standard
10071 or between values and units.
10072 Compare for example this:
10073 \begin_inset Newline newline
10077 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10081 \begin_inset Newline newline
10084 10 kg (normal space
10087 \begin_layout Standard
10088 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10090 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10091 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10093 \begin_inset space ~
10101 arg "space-insert thin"
10107 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10111 \begin_layout Standard
10112 You can also insert the following space types:
10115 \begin_layout Description
10117 \begin_inset space ~
10121 \begin_inset space ~
10124 space A line with a
10125 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10129 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10133 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10136 negative thin space between the arrows.
10139 \begin_layout Description
10141 \begin_inset space ~
10145 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10149 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10153 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10157 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10161 \begin_inset space ~
10165 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10168 em) space between the arrows.
10171 \begin_layout Description
10173 \begin_inset space ~
10177 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10181 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10185 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10189 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10193 \begin_inset space ~
10197 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10200 em) space between the arrows.
10203 \begin_layout Description
10205 \begin_inset space ~
10209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10213 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10217 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10221 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10225 \begin_inset space ~
10229 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10232 em) space between the arrows.
10235 \begin_layout Description
10237 \begin_inset space ~
10241 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10245 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10250 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10254 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10257 cm space between the arrows.
10260 \begin_layout Standard
10262 \begin_inset space ~
10266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10268 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10272 lists the different space sizes.
10275 \begin_layout Standard
10276 \begin_inset Float table
10281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10283 \begin_inset Caption
10285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10286 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10288 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10292 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10302 \begin_inset Tabular
10303 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="8" columns="2">
10304 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
10305 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10306 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10346 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10370 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10394 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10418 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10433 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10446 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10461 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10474 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10489 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10502 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10523 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10529 \begin_inset Index idx
10532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10541 \begin_layout Standard
10542 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special LyX feature for adding extra space
10543 in a uniform fashion.
10544 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
10545 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
10546 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
10547 equally between themselves.
10550 \begin_layout Standard
10551 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
10554 \begin_layout Quote
10556 This is on the left side
10557 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10560 This is on the right
10563 \begin_layout Quote
10566 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10570 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10576 \begin_layout Quote
10579 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10583 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10587 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10593 \begin_layout Standard
10594 That was an example in the
10600 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10604 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10608 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10611 is one in a standard paragraph.
10612 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
10616 sitting in-between the two arrows.
10619 \begin_layout Standard
10620 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
10623 \begin_inset space ~
10628 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
10631 \begin_layout Standard
10633 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
10637 \begin_inset space ~
10643 \begin_layout Standard
10645 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
10649 \begin_inset space ~
10655 \begin_layout Standard
10657 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
10661 \begin_inset space ~
10667 \begin_layout Standard
10669 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
10673 \begin_inset space ~
10679 \begin_layout Standard
10681 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
10685 \begin_inset space ~
10691 \begin_layout Standard
10693 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
10697 \begin_inset space ~
10703 \begin_layout Standard
10704 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10712 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
10716 in the first line in a paragraph, LyX ignores it.
10717 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
10718 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
10722 option in the space dialog.
10730 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10732 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10734 name "sub:Phantom-Space"
10739 \begin_inset Index idx
10742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10751 \begin_layout Standard
10752 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
10753 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
10756 \begin_layout Standard
10757 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
10760 What is correct English?:
10761 \begin_inset Newline newline
10765 \begin_inset Newline newline
10769 \begin_inset space ~
10772 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
10773 \begin_inset Newline newline
10777 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
10780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10788 \begin_inset Newline newline
10792 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
10795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10803 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
10809 \begin_layout Standard
10811 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
10812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10816 \begin_inset space ~
10820 \begin_inset space ~
10824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10828 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
10830 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10831 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10835 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
10837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10841 \begin_inset space ~
10845 \begin_inset space ~
10849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10852 into the phantom inset (note the space after
10853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10861 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
10862 That is why it is named
10863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10871 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
10872 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
10876 \begin_layout Subsection
10878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10880 name "sub:Vertical-Space"
10885 \begin_inset Index idx
10888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10897 \begin_layout Standard
10898 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
10900 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10901 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10903 \begin_inset space ~
10909 There you find the following sizes:
10912 \begin_layout Standard
10925 are LaTeX sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
10930 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
10932 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10933 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10935 \begin_inset space ~
10941 \begin_inset Index idx
10944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10945 Document ! Settings
10950 for the paragraph separation.
10951 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
10962 \begin_layout Standard
10968 \begin_inset Index idx
10971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10977 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
10978 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
10983 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
10984 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
10993 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
10997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11002 s are described in section
11003 \begin_inset space ~
11007 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11009 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
11018 If there are several
11022 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11023 You can therefore use
11027 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11030 \begin_layout Standard
11035 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11036 \begin_inset space ~
11040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11042 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11049 \begin_layout Standard
11050 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11060 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11061 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11073 \begin_layout Subsection
11074 Paragraph Alignment
11075 \begin_inset Index idx
11078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11079 Paragraph ! Alignment
11087 \begin_layout Standard
11088 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11090 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11093 dialog (toolbar button
11096 arg "layout-paragraph"
11100 There are five possibilities:
11103 \begin_layout Itemize
11111 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11117 \begin_layout Itemize
11125 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11131 \begin_layout Itemize
11139 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11145 \begin_layout Itemize
11153 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11159 \begin_layout Itemize
11167 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11173 \begin_layout Standard
11174 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11175 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11176 the left and right margins.
11177 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11180 \begin_layout Standard
11182 This paragraph is right aligned,
11185 \begin_layout Standard
11187 this one is centered,
11190 \begin_layout Standard
11192 this one is left aligned.
11195 \begin_layout Subsection
11197 \begin_inset Index idx
11200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11201 Page breaks ! Forced
11207 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11209 name "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11216 \begin_layout Standard
11217 If you don't like the way LaTeX does the page breaks in your document, you
11218 can force a page break where you want one.
11219 Normally this will not be necessary, because LaTeX is good at page breaking.
11220 Only if you use a lot of
11224 , LaTeX's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11227 \begin_layout Standard
11228 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11229 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11233 have to change the page breaking.
11236 \begin_layout Standard
11237 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11239 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11241 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11242 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11244 \begin_inset space ~
11250 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11252 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11253 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11255 \begin_inset space ~
11260 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11262 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11263 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11266 \begin_layout Standard
11267 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11268 at the top of a page.
11269 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11270 LyX gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11271 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11272 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11276 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11280 to learn more about
11287 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11289 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11291 name "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11296 \begin_inset Index idx
11299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11300 Page breaks ! Clear
11308 \begin_layout Standard
11309 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
11310 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
11311 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
11312 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
11313 it, if necessary by adding pages.
11316 \begin_layout Standard
11317 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
11319 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11320 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11322 \begin_inset space ~
11328 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
11330 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11331 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11333 \begin_inset space ~
11337 \begin_inset space ~
11342 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
11343 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
11346 \begin_layout Subsection
11348 \begin_inset Index idx
11351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11358 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11360 name "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
11367 \begin_layout Standard
11368 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
11370 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
11372 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11373 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11375 \begin_inset space ~
11379 \begin_inset space ~
11387 arg "newline-insert newline"
11391 Another type that is inserted via the menu
11393 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11394 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11396 \begin_inset space ~
11400 \begin_inset space ~
11408 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
11411 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
11413 This is useful to avoid
11414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11421 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
11424 \begin_layout Standard
11425 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct LaTeX's line breaking, as
11426 LaTeX is very good at line breaking.
11427 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
11428 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
11429 \begin_inset space ~
11433 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11435 reference "sec:Quote"
11440 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11442 reference "sec:Verse"
11447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11449 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
11456 \begin_layout Subsection
11458 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11460 name "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
11465 \begin_inset Index idx
11468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11477 \begin_layout Standard
11479 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11490 \begin_layout Standard
11494 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11495 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11497 \begin_inset space ~
11502 you can insert horizontal lines.
11503 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
11504 of the current text line or the paragraph.
11505 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
11508 \begin_layout Standard
11510 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11521 \begin_layout Section
11522 Characters and Symbols
11525 \begin_layout Standard
11526 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
11527 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
11528 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
11530 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11536 reference "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
11540 for information on how this is done.
11543 \begin_layout Standard
11544 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
11549 dialog via the menu
11551 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11552 Special Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11558 \begin_layout Standard
11559 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11567 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
11568 when you are using a special screen font in LyX's preferences.
11569 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
11577 \begin_layout Section
11578 Fonts and Text Styles
11579 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11581 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
11588 \begin_layout Subsection
11590 \begin_inset Index idx
11593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11602 \begin_layout Standard
11603 There are two types of fonts:
11606 \begin_layout Description
11608 \begin_inset space ~
11612 \begin_inset Index idx
11615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11621 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
11622 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11626 characters) in the font.
11627 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
11628 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
11629 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
11630 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
11631 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
11632 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
11633 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
11634 \begin_inset Newline newline
11637 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
11638 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
11639 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
11640 sizes than at small ones.
11641 \begin_inset Newline newline
11655 \begin_inset space ~
11663 \begin_layout Description
11665 \begin_inset space ~
11669 \begin_inset Index idx
11672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11678 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
11679 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
11680 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
11681 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
11682 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
11683 image manipulation program.
11684 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
11685 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
11686 \begin_inset space ~
11689 pixels high up to 34
11690 \begin_inset space ~
11693 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
11694 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
11695 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
11697 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
11698 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
11699 \begin_inset Newline newline
11702 Bitmap fonts are named
11705 \begin_inset space ~
11710 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
11713 \begin_layout Standard
11714 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
11715 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
11716 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
11717 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
11718 use scalable fonts.
11721 \begin_layout Standard
11722 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
11725 \begin_layout Standard
11726 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
11727 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
11728 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
11729 font to emphasize text, you use an
11730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11738 This concept fits in perfectly with LyX.
11739 In LyX, you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
11743 \begin_layout Subsection
11745 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11747 name "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
11754 \begin_layout Standard
11755 Traditionally, LaTeX used its own fonts.
11756 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
11757 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your LaTeX
11759 The reason is that LaTeX needs some extra information about the fonts,
11760 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
11761 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
11762 to a word processor.
11763 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
11764 are generally of very good quality, and that LaTeX files are very portable
11765 across different machines.
11766 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional LaTeX has increased a
11767 lot in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
11769 In LyX, only a subset of these are directly selectable via the user interface
11771 \begin_inset space ~
11775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11777 reference "sub:Document-Font"
11782 However, all the others are available if you enter the relevant LaTeX code
11783 in the document preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired
11787 \begin_layout Standard
11788 Recent developments brought some new LaTeX engines that are also able directly
11789 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely XeTeX
11791 Both engines are supported by LyX.
11792 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
11793 that is installed on your system.
11794 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
11797 \begin_layout Standard
11798 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11806 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
11807 es; so you might have to experiment.
11815 \begin_layout Standard
11816 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11824 XeTeX and especially LuaTeX, are still rather new and thus not as mature
11825 as traditional LaTeX or PDFTeX.
11833 \begin_layout Subsection
11834 Document Font and Font size
11835 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11837 name "sub:Document-Font"
11842 \begin_inset Index idx
11845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11852 \begin_inset Index idx
11855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11864 \begin_layout Standard
11865 You can set the document fonts in the
11867 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11871 \begin_inset Index idx
11874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11875 Document ! Settings
11885 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
11886 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
11889 \begin_inset space ~
11898 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
11899 for (some) sans serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit
11900 with the roman font.
11903 \begin_layout Standard
11910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11919 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
11920 This requires that you use
11926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11965 as the output format, i.
11966 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11970 \begin_inset space \space{}
11973 you will have to have either XeTeX or LuaTeX installed (see section
11974 \begin_inset space ~
11978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11980 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
11985 You will then not have access to TeX's own fonts.
11986 Note that LyX then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists
11988 \begin_inset space ~
11991 serif, and typewriter), since LyX cannot determine the family.
11992 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
11993 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar \slash{}
11995 LyX cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
11998 \begin_layout Standard
11999 If you use TeX fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the
12004 and a list of fonts available with your LaTeX distribution.
12009 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12010 In most cases, this will be the standard TeX font, known as
12011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12017 \begin_inset space ~
12023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12036 European Computer Modern
12039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12046 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12049 \begin_layout Standard
12058 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12059 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12064 This problem doesn't appear if you read PDFs in
12067 \begin_inset space ~
12072 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12078 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12079 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12082 \begin_layout Itemize
12086 \begin_inset space ~
12091 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12104 \begin_inset space ~
12109 was developed for the LaTeX community in order to replace
12113 as the default font.
12114 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12115 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12118 \begin_inset space ~
12131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12132 One difference is improved kerning.
12140 \begin_layout Itemize
12144 \begin_inset space ~
12148 \begin_inset space ~
12153 fonts in (the rare) case that
12156 \begin_inset space ~
12161 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12176 Virtual means that it
12177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12188 -glyphs from other fonts.
12189 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12211 Loading the LaTeX-package
12216 \begin_inset Index idx
12219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12220 LaTeX-packages ! aeguill
12225 with the document preamble line
12226 \begin_inset Newline newline
12233 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12234 \begin_inset Newline newline
12239 will fix the guillemet problem.
12244 and that accented characters are not
12248 glyph, but built of
12252 characters, the accent and the letter.
12253 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12259 If you search for example for the French word
12260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12267 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12276 and not for the glyph
12277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12281 \begin_inset space ~
12285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12291 \begin_layout Itemize
12292 If you do not like the look of
12300 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12301 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12305 \begin_inset space ~
12311 \begin_inset space ~
12321 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12322 \begin_inset space ~
12325 serif and typewriter fonts,
12329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12330 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12331 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12337 \begin_inset space ~
12346 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
12347 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12351 \begin_inset space \space{}
12359 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12363 \begin_inset space \space{}
12369 \begin_inset space ~
12377 \begin_inset space ~
12387 but you can also select your own.
12388 \begin_inset Newline newline
12391 The differences between roman,
12394 \begin_inset space ~
12403 fonts are explained in section
12404 \begin_inset space ~
12408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12410 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12415 \begin_inset Newline newline
12421 \begin_inset space ~
12426 was originally designed for newspapers.
12427 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
12428 into the small newspaper columns.
12432 \begin_inset space ~
12437 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
12440 \begin_layout Standard
12441 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
12454 Some classes provide additional sizes.
12459 depends on the class you are using.
12460 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
12463 \begin_layout Standard
12464 Note that the font size is the
12469 That means that LyX scales all other possible font sizes (such as those
12470 used in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
12471 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
12474 \begin_inset space ~
12480 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
12481 \begin_inset space ~
12485 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12487 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12494 \begin_layout Standard
12498 \begin_inset space ~
12503 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
12505 \begin_inset space ~
12508 serif or typewriter.
12513 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
12523 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
12526 \begin_layout Standard
12535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12544 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
12550 \begin_inset Index idx
12553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12554 LaTeX-packages ! fontenc
12560 \begin_inset space ~
12564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12566 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
12571 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
12572 Unless you have specific reasons, use
12579 \begin_layout Standard
12580 With some fonts, the checkboxes
12582 Use Old Style Figures
12586 Use True Small Caps
12589 These are extra features some fonts provide.
12592 Use Old Style Figures
12594 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
12596 Old style figures are the numerals (0
12597 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12601 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12604 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
12608 Use True Small Caps
12610 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
12611 of scaled capitals.
12612 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
12613 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
12616 \begin_layout Standard
12621 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
12622 a font to display the script characters.
12626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12627 The font will be the argument for the commands of the LaTeX-package
12632 \begin_inset Index idx
12635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12636 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
12641 So this has no effect for the document language
12655 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
12659 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12667 When you choose a new font or font size, LyX does
12671 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
12672 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
12673 LyX's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
12675 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12678 dialog, see section
12679 \begin_inset space ~
12683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12685 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
12697 \begin_layout Subsection
12698 Using Different Character Styles
12699 \begin_inset Index idx
12702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12709 \begin_inset Index idx
12712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12721 \begin_layout Standard
12722 As we've already seen, LyX automatically changes the character style for
12723 certain paragraph environments.
12724 LyX supports two character styles,
12733 You can activate both of these styles via keybindings, the menus, and the
12737 \begin_layout Standard
12742 style, do one of the following:
12745 \begin_layout Itemize
12746 click on the toolbar button
12755 \begin_layout Itemize
12756 use the key binding
12765 \begin_layout Standard
12766 These commands are all toggles.
12771 style is already active, they deactivate it.
12774 \begin_layout Standard
12775 One typically uses the
12779 style for proper names.
12781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12788 is the original author of LyX.
12789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12795 \begin_layout Standard
12796 A more widely used character style is the
12801 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
12808 \begin_layout Itemize
12809 clicking on the toolbar button
12818 \begin_layout Itemize
12819 using the keybindings
12828 \begin_layout Standard
12833 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or LaTeX-packag
12834 es use a different font.
12837 \begin_layout Standard
12838 We've been using the
12842 style all over the place in this document.
12843 Here's one more example:
12846 \begin_layout Quotation
12849 Do not overuse character styles!
12852 \begin_layout Standard
12853 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
12854 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
12855 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
12856 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
12860 \begin_layout Standard
12861 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
12869 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12871 \begin_inset space ~
12874 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12880 arg "dialog-show character"
12886 \begin_layout Subsection
12887 Fine-Tuning with the
12892 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12894 name "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12899 \begin_inset Index idx
12902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12911 \begin_layout Standard
12912 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
12913 LyX gives you a way to create a custom character style.
12914 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
12915 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
12916 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
12917 from ordinary dialog.
12920 \begin_layout Standard
12921 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
12922 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
12923 \begin_inset Newline newline
12926 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
12927 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
12930 \begin_layout Standard
12931 To use custom character styles, open the
12933 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12935 \begin_inset space ~
12938 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12941 dialog or press the toolbar button
12944 arg "dialog-show character"
12948 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
12949 font property that you can choose.
12950 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
12953 \begin_inset space ~
12958 , which keeps the current state of that property.
12963 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
12964 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
12965 environments all at once.
12968 \begin_layout Standard
12969 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
12972 \begin_inset space ~
12984 \begin_layout Labeling
12985 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
12991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12999 The possible options are:
13003 \begin_layout Labeling
13004 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13009 This is the Roman font family.
13010 Normally a serif font.
13011 It's also the default family.
13021 \begin_layout Labeling
13022 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13026 \begin_inset space ~
13033 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13045 \begin_layout Labeling
13046 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13053 This is the Typewriter font family.
13059 arg "font-typewriter"
13068 \begin_layout Labeling
13069 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13074 This corresponds to the print weight.
13079 \begin_layout Labeling
13080 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13085 This is the Medium font series.
13086 It's also the default series.
13089 \begin_layout Labeling
13090 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13097 This is the Bold font series.
13110 \begin_layout Labeling
13111 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13116 As the name implies.
13121 \begin_layout Labeling
13122 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13127 This is the Upright font shape.
13128 It's also the default shape.
13131 \begin_layout Labeling
13132 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13146 s the Italic font shape
13152 \begin_layout Labeling
13153 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13160 This is the Slanted font shape
13162 (although it might not be visible in LyX, this is different from italic).
13165 \begin_layout Labeling
13166 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13170 \begin_inset space ~
13177 This is the Small caps font shape
13184 \begin_layout Labeling
13185 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13190 Alters the text color.
13191 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
13195 \begin_inset space ~
13200 , which means that the document default color set in
13202 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13203 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13209 \begin_inset space ~
13214 is used, you can choose between
13247 \begin_inset Index idx
13250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13259 \begin_layout Labeling
13260 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13265 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
13266 the language of the document.
13267 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
13269 \begin_inset Newline newline
13272 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
13273 LaTeX respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
13274 When using the spell checking (see section
13275 \begin_inset space ~
13279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13281 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
13285 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
13288 \begin_layout Labeling
13289 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13294 Alters the size of the font.
13295 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
13296 proportional to the document font size.
13297 Once again, you don't feed LyX the details, but a general description of
13298 what you want to do.
13303 \begin_layout Labeling
13304 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13325 arg "font-size tiny"
13331 \begin_layout Labeling
13332 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13353 arg "font-size scriptsize"
13359 \begin_layout Labeling
13360 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13381 arg "font-size footnotesize"
13387 \begin_layout Labeling
13388 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13409 arg "font-size small"
13415 \begin_layout Labeling
13416 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13430 It's also the default size.
13434 arg "font-size normal"
13440 \begin_layout Labeling
13441 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13462 arg "font-size large"
13468 \begin_layout Labeling
13469 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13490 arg "font-size larger"
13496 \begin_layout Labeling
13497 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13518 arg "font-size largest"
13524 \begin_layout Labeling
13525 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13546 arg "font-size huge"
13552 \begin_layout Labeling
13553 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13574 arg "font-size giant"
13580 \begin_layout Labeling
13581 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13586 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
13587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13606 arg "font-size increase"
13612 \begin_layout Labeling
13613 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13618 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
13619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13638 arg "font-size decrease"
13645 \begin_layout Standard
13650 : don't go crazy with this feature.
13651 You should almost never need to change the font size.
13652 LyX automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
13653 — use those instead.
13654 This is here for fine-tuning only!
13657 \begin_layout Labeling
13658 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13663 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
13668 \begin_layout Labeling
13669 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13676 This is text with emphasize on
13679 This might seem like the same as
13683 , but it is actually a bit different.
13689 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
13691 Normally this font is equal to italic.
13694 \begin_layout Labeling
13695 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13702 This is text with Underbar on.
13708 arg "font-underline"
13714 \begin_inset Newline newline
13719 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
13720 when you could not change fonts.
13721 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
13722 This is only possible in LyX because some people
13726 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
13729 \begin_layout Labeling
13730 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13734 \begin_inset space ~
13741 This is text with Double underbar on.
13747 arg "font-underunderline"
13751 \begin_inset Newline newline
13754 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
13755 about double underbar.
13758 \begin_layout Labeling
13759 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13763 \begin_inset space ~
13770 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
13776 arg "font-underwave"
13780 \begin_inset Newline newline
13783 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
13784 Keep antinausea pills handy.
13787 \begin_layout Labeling
13788 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13795 This is text with Strikeout on.
13801 arg "font-strikeout"
13805 \begin_inset Newline newline
13808 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
13809 changed in the meantime.
13812 \begin_layout Labeling
13813 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13820 This is text with Noun on.
13827 , this is a logical attribute.
13828 Normally it's equivalent to
13831 \begin_inset space ~
13840 \begin_layout Standard
13841 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
13842 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
13844 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13846 \begin_inset space ~
13849 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13855 arg "dialog-show character"
13858 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
13859 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
13862 arg "textstyle-apply"
13866 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
13870 \begin_layout Standard
13871 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
13878 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
13879 (suppose you just set the shape to
13880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13898 \begin_inset space ~
13910 \begin_layout Standard
13911 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
13919 \begin_inset space ~
13931 \begin_layout Itemize
13937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13944 font, which means every character has the same width; the
13945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13962 \begin_inset Newline newline
13966 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
13969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13980 \begin_inset Note Note
13983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13984 For more on phantoms see section
13985 \begin_inset space ~
13989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13991 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
14001 \begin_inset Newline newline
14007 \begin_layout Itemize
14012 fonts use characters with serifs.
14013 These are the small
14014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14021 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14022 The following example shows the difference:
14023 \begin_inset Newline newline
14027 \begin_inset Newline newline
14032 text without serifs
14035 \begin_inset Newline newline
14038 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14039 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14046 \begin_layout Itemize
14051 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14052 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14053 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14056 \begin_layout Standard
14057 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14061 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14064 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14065 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14068 \begin_inset space ~
14073 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14074 the property to be removed.
14075 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14076 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14077 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14095 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14096 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14104 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14108 \begin_inset space ~
14113 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14124 If you, for example, set
14125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14143 \begin_inset space ~
14148 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
14150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14157 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
14160 \begin_layout Standard
14161 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
14162 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
14165 \begin_layout Section
14166 Printing and Previewing
14169 \begin_layout Subsection
14173 \begin_layout Standard
14174 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
14175 using LyX, you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
14176 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
14177 goes on behind-the-scenes.
14178 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
14180 Additional Features
14185 \begin_layout Standard
14186 LyX uses the program LaTeX as its backend.
14187 LaTeX is just a macro package for the TeX typesetting system, but to prevent
14188 confusion, we will only refer to LaTeX.
14189 LyX is what you use to do your actual writing.
14190 Then, LyX calls LaTeX to turn your writing into printable output.
14191 This happens in two stages:
14194 \begin_layout Enumerate
14195 First, LyX converts your document to a series of text commands for LaTeX,
14196 generating a file with the extension,
14197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14211 \begin_layout Enumerate
14212 Next, LyX calls LaTeX to use the commands in the
14216 file to produce printable output.
14219 \begin_layout Subsection
14220 Output file formats
14221 \begin_inset Index idx
14224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14231 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14233 name "sub:Output-file-formats"
14240 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14241 Simple text (ASCII)
14242 \begin_inset Index idx
14245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14246 File formats ! ASCII
14254 \begin_layout Standard
14255 This file type has the extension
14256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14268 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
14269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14272 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
14273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14279 \begin_layout Standard
14280 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
14282 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14283 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14285 \begin_inset space ~
14291 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
14292 a BibTeX bibliography (section
14293 \begin_inset space ~
14297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14299 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
14304 If your document includes such material, use
14306 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14307 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14309 \begin_inset space ~
14313 \begin_inset space ~
14317 \begin_inset space ~
14325 \begin_inset space ~
14329 \begin_inset space ~
14335 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
14336 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
14339 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14341 \begin_inset Index idx
14344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14345 File formats ! LaTeX
14353 \begin_layout Standard
14354 This file type has the extension
14355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14366 and contains all commands that are necessary for the LaTeX program to process
14368 If you know LaTeX, you can use it to find out LaTeX-Errors or to process
14369 it manually with console commands.
14370 The LaTeX-file is automatically created in LyX's temporary directory whenever
14371 you view or export your document.
14374 \begin_layout Standard
14375 You can export your document as a LaTeX-file using the menu
14377 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14378 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14393 The different LaTeX export variants are explained in section
14394 \begin_inset space ~
14398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14400 reference "sub:Export"
14407 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14409 \begin_inset Index idx
14412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14421 \begin_layout Standard
14422 This file type has the extension
14423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14443 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
14444 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
14445 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
14449 \begin_layout Standard
14450 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
14451 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
14452 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
14453 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
14454 when you view the DVI.
14455 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
14458 \begin_layout Standard
14459 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
14461 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14462 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14467 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14468 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14470 \begin_inset space ~
14477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14487 The latter option uses the program
14496 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
14497 font access (see section
14498 \begin_inset space ~
14502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14504 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
14509 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
14510 standard TeX processor.
14513 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14515 \begin_inset Index idx
14518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14519 File formats ! PostScript
14527 \begin_layout Standard
14528 This file type has the extension
14529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14541 PostScript was developed by the company
14545 as a printer language.
14546 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
14548 PostScript can be seen as a
14549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14552 programming language
14553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14556 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
14560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14561 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the LaTeX-pack
14567 \begin_inset Index idx
14570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14571 LaTeX-packages ! pstricks
14581 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
14584 \begin_layout Standard
14585 PostScript can only contain images in the format
14586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14589 Encapsulated PostScript
14590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14593 (EPS, file extension
14594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14606 As LyX allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has
14607 to convert them in the background to EPS.
14608 If, for example, you have 50
14609 \begin_inset space ~
14612 images in your document, LyX has to do 50
14613 \begin_inset space ~
14616 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
14617 This might slow down your workflow with LyX.
14618 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
14619 EPS to avoid this problem.
14622 \begin_layout Standard
14623 You can export to PostScript using the menu
14625 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14626 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14632 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14634 \begin_inset Index idx
14637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14644 \begin_inset Index idx
14647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14656 \begin_layout Standard
14657 This file type has the extension
14658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14674 Portable Document Format
14675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14682 was derived from PostScript.
14683 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
14685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14692 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
14693 looks exactly the same.
14696 \begin_layout Standard
14697 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
14698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14701 Joint Photographic Experts Group
14702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14705 (JPG, file extension
14706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14733 Portable Network Graphics
14734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14737 (PNG, file extension
14738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14750 You can also use any other image format, because LyX converts them in the
14751 background to one of these formats.
14752 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
14753 will slow down your workflow.
14754 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
14757 \begin_layout Standard
14758 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
14760 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14766 \begin_layout Description
14768 \begin_inset space ~
14771 (pdflatex) This uses the program
14775 which converts your file directly to PDF.
14778 \begin_layout Description
14780 \begin_inset space ~
14787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14794 X) This uses the program
14798 which converts your file directly to PDF.
14803 is a new engine, derived from
14807 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
14808 access (see section
14809 \begin_inset space ~
14813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14815 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
14820 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
14821 standard TeX processor.
14824 \begin_layout Description
14826 \begin_inset space ~
14833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14840 X) This uses the program
14844 that converts your file directly to PDF.
14849 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
14850 font access (see section
14851 \begin_inset space ~
14855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14857 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
14862 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
14863 vertically written Japanese.
14866 \begin_layout Description
14868 \begin_inset space ~
14871 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
14875 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
14879 \begin_layout Description
14881 \begin_inset space ~
14884 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
14888 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
14889 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
14893 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
14894 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
14897 \begin_layout Standard
14901 \begin_inset space ~
14910 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
14911 works without problems.
14912 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar \slash{}
14913 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
14917 \begin_inset space ~
14924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14936 \begin_inset space ~
14943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14952 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
14960 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14962 \begin_inset Index idx
14965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14966 FileFormats ! XHTML
14972 \begin_inset Index idx
14975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14984 \begin_layout Standard
14985 This file type has the extension
14986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14998 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
14999 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15000 When LyX produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15001 suitable for the purpose.
15002 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15004 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15005 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15008 between different formats, which are described in section
15010 Math Output in XHTML
15015 \begin_inset space ~
15023 \begin_layout Standard
15024 XHTML output remains
15025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15032 , and not all LyX features are supported yet.
15035 LyX and the World Wide Web
15039 Additional Features
15041 manual, for more information.
15044 \begin_layout Standard
15045 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15047 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15048 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15054 \begin_layout Subsection
15056 \begin_inset Index idx
15059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15068 \begin_layout Standard
15069 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15070 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15079 or use the toolbar button
15086 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15087 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15088 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15092 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15094 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15098 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15100 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15106 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15111 Further output formats can be selected via
15113 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15114 View (Other Formats)
15116 or the toolbar button
15117 \begin_inset Graphics
15118 filename ../images/view-others.png
15120 groupId toolbarbuttons
15127 \begin_layout Standard
15128 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15129 viewer window using the menu
15131 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15136 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15137 Update (Other Formats)
15142 \begin_layout Standard
15143 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in LyX's temporary
15145 To have a real output, export your document.
15148 \begin_layout Subsection
15149 Printing the File from within LyX
15150 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15152 name "sub:Printing-the-File"
15159 \begin_layout Standard
15160 Instead of exporting your file and then printing it, you can also print
15161 it directly from within LyX.
15162 To print a file, select the menu
15164 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15170 arg "dialog-show print"
15173 ) or click on the toolbar button
15176 arg "dialog-show print"
15180 LyX will internally call LaTeX to produce a DVI.
15181 This file is then processed by the program
15185 to a PostScript-file, which is finally printed using the program
15190 Due to these steps in the background, this method is not the fastest.
15193 \begin_layout Standard
15194 You can set the following print parameters in the
15197 \begin_inset space ~
15205 \begin_layout Labeling
15206 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15211 This is the name of the printer to print to.
15215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15216 Note that this printer name is for the program
15225 has to be configured for this printer name.
15226 The default printer can be set in LyX's preferences dialog, see section
15227 \begin_inset space ~
15231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15233 reference "sub:Printer"
15242 The printer should understand PostScript.
15245 \begin_layout Labeling
15246 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15251 The name of a file to print to.
15252 The output will be a PostScript file.
15253 It will be written in LyX's working directory unless you specify the full
15257 \begin_layout Standard
15258 You can choose to print only a range of pages, only even-numbered or only
15259 odd-numbered pages or to print the pages in reverse — the latter options
15260 are useful for printing on two sides with a printer without a duplexer:
15261 you re-insert the pages after printing one set to print on the other side.
15262 Some printers spit out pages face-up, others, face-down.
15263 By choosing a particular order to print in, you can take the entire stack
15264 of pages out of the printer without needing to reorder them.
15267 \begin_layout Section
15268 A few Words about Typography
15269 \begin_inset Index idx
15272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15281 \begin_layout Subsection
15282 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
15283 \begin_inset Index idx
15286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15293 \begin_inset Index idx
15296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15305 \begin_layout Standard
15307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15318 character comes in four lengths: the
15330 , and the minus sign:
15331 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15337 \begin_layout Standard
15338 \begin_inset Tabular
15339 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
15340 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
15341 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15342 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15343 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15344 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15373 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15413 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15438 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15440 \begin_inset space ~
15443 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15450 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15475 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15477 \begin_inset space ~
15480 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15501 \begin_inset Formula $-$
15509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15535 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15541 \begin_layout Standard
15542 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
15543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15554 character multiple times in a row.
15555 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
15556 the final output, but not in LyX.
15558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15562 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15574 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15578 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15588 \begin_layout Standard
15589 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
15590 math mode and has a length of its own.
15591 Here are some examples:
15594 \begin_layout Enumerate
15595 line- and page-breaks
15596 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15606 \begin_layout Enumerate
15608 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15618 \begin_layout Enumerate
15619 Oh — there's a dash.
15620 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15630 \begin_layout Enumerate
15631 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
15635 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15645 \begin_layout Subsection
15647 \begin_inset Index idx
15650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15657 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15659 name "sub:Hyphenation"
15666 \begin_layout Standard
15667 Words are not hyphenated within LyX but automatically in the output.
15668 Hyphenation is done by the LaTeX-package
15673 \begin_inset Index idx
15676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15677 LaTeX-packages ! babel
15682 following the rules of the document language.
15685 \begin_layout Standard
15686 LaTeX hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
15691 font and with unusual constructs, like
15692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15700 If LaTeX cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points
15702 This is done with the menu
15704 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15705 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15707 \begin_inset space ~
15713 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to LaTeX.
15714 If no hyphenation is necessary, LaTeX will ignore them.
15717 \begin_layout Standard
15718 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
15719 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
15721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15729 LaTeX would then see the hyphen
15730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15737 as a hyphenation possibility.
15738 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
15739 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
15740 as described in section
15741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15744 Prevent Hyphenation
15745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15751 \begin_inset space ~
15759 \begin_layout Subsection
15761 \begin_inset Index idx
15764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15773 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15774 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
15775 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15777 name "sub:Abbreviations"
15784 \begin_layout Standard
15785 When LyX calls LaTeX to generate the final version of your document, LaTeX
15786 automatically distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
15787 LaTeX then adds the
15788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15791 appropriate amount of space.
15792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15795 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
15797 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
15798 gets after another word.
15801 \begin_layout Standard
15802 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
15803 not work in all cases.
15805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15816 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
15817 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
15820 \begin_layout Standard
15821 Here are some examples of
15825 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
15828 \begin_layout Itemize
15833 \begin_layout Itemize
15838 \begin_layout Standard
15839 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
15842 \begin_layout Itemize
15844 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15848 this is too much space!
15851 \begin_layout Itemize
15856 \begin_layout Standard
15857 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
15860 \begin_layout Standard
15861 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
15864 \begin_layout Enumerate
15868 \begin_inset space ~
15873 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
15874 \begin_inset space ~
15878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15880 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
15885 \begin_inset Index idx
15888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15889 Spaces ! inter-word
15897 \begin_layout Enumerate
15901 \begin_inset space ~
15906 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
15907 \begin_inset space ~
15911 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15913 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
15918 \begin_inset Index idx
15921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15930 \begin_layout Enumerate
15934 \begin_inset space ~
15938 \begin_inset space ~
15942 \begin_inset space ~
15949 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15951 \begin_inset space ~
15956 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
15957 This function is also bound to
15960 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
15966 \begin_layout Standard
15967 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
15970 \begin_layout Itemize
15972 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15976 \begin_inset space \space{}
15979 this is too much space!
15982 \begin_layout Itemize
15983 This is I\SpecialChar \@.
15987 \begin_layout Standard
15988 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
15989 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because LaTeX
15990 will take care of this.
15993 \begin_layout Standard
15994 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
15998 \begin_inset space ~
16003 feature described in the section
16009 Additional Features
16014 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16016 \begin_inset Index idx
16019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16020 Typography ! Quotes
16026 \begin_inset Index idx
16029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16060 \begin_layout Standard
16061 LyX usually sets quotes correctly.
16062 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16063 and use a closing quote at the end.
16065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16073 The keyboard character,
16077 , generates this automatically.
16080 \begin_layout Standard
16081 You can specify what character the
16085 key produces using the submenu
16091 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16095 \begin_inset Index idx
16098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16099 Document ! Settings
16109 There are six choices:
16112 \begin_layout Labeling
16113 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16136 \begin_layout Labeling
16137 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16140 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16144 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16150 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16154 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16160 \begin_layout Labeling
16161 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16164 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16168 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16174 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16178 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16184 \begin_layout Labeling
16185 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16188 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16192 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16198 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16202 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16208 \begin_layout Labeling
16209 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16212 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16216 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16222 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16226 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16232 \begin_layout Labeling
16233 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16236 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16240 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16246 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16250 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16256 \begin_layout Standard
16257 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
16260 arg "quote-insert single"
16266 \begin_layout Subsection
16268 \begin_inset Index idx
16271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16272 Typography ! Ligatures
16278 \begin_inset Index idx
16281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16310 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16312 name "sub:Ligatures"
16319 \begin_layout Standard
16320 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
16321 print them as single characters.
16322 These groups are known as
16327 Since LaTeX knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too
16329 Here are the standard ligatures:
16332 \begin_layout Itemize
16336 \begin_layout Itemize
16340 \begin_layout Itemize
16344 \begin_layout Itemize
16348 \begin_layout Itemize
16352 \begin_layout Standard
16353 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
16356 \begin_layout Standard
16357 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
16358 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
16359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16366 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
16367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16382 To break a ligature, use
16384 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16385 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16387 \begin_inset space ~
16394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16405 cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
16407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16422 Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
16424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16430 \begin_layout Subsection
16432 \begin_inset Index idx
16435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16442 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16444 name "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
16451 \begin_layout Standard
16452 You will certainly have noticed that the word “LaTeX” always appears with
16453 characters in different sizes and heights.
16454 LaTeX is the name of the program used by LyX and is therefore recognized
16455 as a proper name when you type it in LyX as
16456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16475 \begin_inset Note Note
16478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16479 The braces in TeX Code are here to avoid that the
16480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16487 appear as proper name in the output, see the last paragraph of this section.
16488 To create proper names omit the TeX Code.
16493 Note the order of the upper- and lowercase letters! LyX recognizes the
16494 following proper names:
16497 \begin_layout Description
16498 LyX The name of the game, write
16499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16520 \begin_layout Description
16521 TeX The program used by LaTeX, write
16522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16543 \begin_layout Description
16544 LaTeX The program used by LyX, write
16545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16566 \begin_layout Description
16567 LaTeX2e The actual version of LaTeX, write
16568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16589 \begin_layout Standard
16590 You might wonder why the LaTeX-version is
16591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16595 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
16599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16603 It is an old tradition in the TeX-world to give programs geek version numbers.
16604 For example the version number of TeX converges to the number
16605 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
16608 : The actual version is
16609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16616 , the previous one was
16617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16627 \begin_layout Standard
16628 If you don't want to use proper names, for example, in section headings,
16629 you can insert two empty braces in TeX Code in the word.
16630 In LyX this will look like
16631 \begin_inset Graphics
16632 filename clipart/LaTeX.png
16638 \begin_inset Newline newline
16641 For more about TeX Code, see section
16642 \begin_inset space ~
16646 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16648 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
16655 \begin_layout Subsection
16657 \begin_inset Index idx
16660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16669 \begin_layout Standard
16670 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
16671 space between two words.
16672 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
16675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16682 for units use the menu
16684 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16685 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16687 \begin_inset space ~
16695 arg "space-insert thin"
16701 \begin_layout Standard
16702 Here is an example to show the differences:
16705 \begin_layout Standard
16706 \begin_inset Tabular
16707 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
16708 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
16709 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16710 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16717 \begin_inset space ~
16721 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
16729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16733 space between number and unit
16740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16745 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16749 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
16757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16761 half space between number and unit
16774 \begin_layout Subsection
16776 \begin_inset Index idx
16779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16780 Typography ! Widows and orphans
16788 \begin_layout Standard
16789 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
16791 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
16792 You may remember once printing out a document, only to find the heading
16793 for a new section printed at the very bottom of the page, the first line
16794 of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom of a page, or the last line
16795 of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
16796 These bits of text became known as
16807 \begin_layout Standard
16808 Clearly, LyX can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
16809 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
16810 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
16811 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
16812 built into LaTeX governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there
16813 specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
16814 This is the advantage LyX has in using LaTeX as its backend.
16817 \begin_layout Standard
16818 We cannot go into how TeX and LaTeX decide to break a page, or how you can
16819 tweak that behavior.
16820 Some LaTeX books listed in the bibliography (such as
16821 \begin_inset space ~
16825 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
16827 key "latexcompanion"
16832 \begin_inset space ~
16836 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
16842 ) may have more information.
16843 You will almost never need to worry about this, however.
16846 \begin_layout Chapter
16847 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
16848 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16850 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
16857 \begin_layout Standard
16858 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
16861 \begin_inset space ~
16867 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
16870 \begin_layout Section
16872 \begin_inset Index idx
16875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16882 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16891 \begin_layout Standard
16892 LyX offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
16895 \begin_layout Description
16897 \begin_inset space ~
16900 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
16901 \begin_inset Newline newline
16905 \begin_inset Note Note
16908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16909 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
16917 \begin_layout Description
16918 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
16919 a LaTeX-comment when you export the document to LaTeX via the menu
16921 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16922 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16935 \begin_inset space ~
16941 \begin_inset Newline newline
16945 \begin_inset Note Comment
16948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16949 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in LaTeX-files.
16957 \begin_layout Description
16959 \begin_inset space ~
16962 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
16963 set in the document settings under
16965 Colors\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16967 \begin_inset space ~
16973 \begin_inset Newline newline
16977 \begin_inset Newline newline
16981 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
16984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16990 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
16991 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
16996 of a comment that appears in the output.
17002 \begin_inset Newline newline
17006 \begin_inset Newline newline
17009 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17012 \begin_layout Standard
17013 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17021 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17025 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17028 \begin_layout Section
17030 \begin_inset Index idx
17033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17040 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17042 name "sec:Footnotes"
17049 \begin_layout Standard
17050 LyX uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the
17053 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17056 or the toolbar button
17059 arg "footnote-insert"
17071 \begin_inset Graphics
17072 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17081 This box is LyX's representation of your footnote.
17091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17110 label, the box will
17114 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17115 Clicking on the box label again will close
17128 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17129 and click on the footnote
17144 \begin_layout Standard
17145 Here is an example footnote:
17153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17154 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17162 \begin_layout Standard
17163 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17164 position where the footnote box is placed.
17165 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17166 The footnote number is calculated by LyX according to the document class.
17167 LyX does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get
17168 other schemes using special LaTeX-commands.
17173 ey are described in the
17176 \begin_inset space ~
17184 \begin_layout Section
17186 \begin_inset Index idx
17189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17196 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17198 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17205 \begin_layout Standard
17206 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in LyX.
17207 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17209 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17211 \begin_inset space ~
17216 or the toolbar button
17219 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17245 appearing within your text.
17246 This box is LyX's representation of your margin
17255 \begin_layout Standard
17256 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17260 \begin_inset Marginal
17263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17265 This is a marginal note.
17273 \begin_layout Standard
17274 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17275 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17276 pages, right on odd pages.
17279 \begin_layout Standard
17280 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17283 \begin_inset space ~
17291 \begin_inset space ~
17299 \begin_layout Section
17300 Graphics and Images
17301 \begin_inset Index idx
17304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17311 \begin_inset Index idx
17314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17321 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17323 name "sec:Graphics"
17330 \begin_layout Standard
17331 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
17332 you want and click on the toolbar icon
17335 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
17340 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17344 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
17347 \begin_layout Standard
17348 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
17353 tab allows you to choose your image file.
17354 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
17356 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
17357 \begin_inset space ~
17361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17363 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
17370 \begin_layout Standard
17375 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
17376 of the image in the output.
17377 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
17381 \begin_inset space ~
17385 \begin_inset space ~
17394 \begin_inset space ~
17398 \begin_inset space ~
17402 \begin_inset space ~
17407 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
17408 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
17416 \begin_layout Standard
17423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17431 \begin_inset space ~
17435 \begin_inset space ~
17442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17451 tab LaTeX experts can specify additional LaTeX options.
17452 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside LyX.
17456 \begin_inset space ~
17461 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
17462 with the image size is printed.
17466 \begin_inset space ~
17470 \begin_inset space ~
17474 \begin_inset space ~
17479 is explained in the
17482 \begin_inset space ~
17494 \begin_layout Standard
17495 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
17496 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
17498 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
17501 \begin_layout Standard
17503 \begin_inset Graphics
17504 filename clipart/mobius.eps
17512 \begin_layout Standard
17513 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
17514 the image into a float, see section
17515 \begin_inset space ~
17519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17521 reference "sub:Figure-Floats"
17528 \begin_layout Subsection
17530 \begin_inset Index idx
17533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17540 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17542 name "sub:Image-Formats"
17549 \begin_layout Standard
17550 You can insert images in any known file format.
17551 But as we explained in section
17552 \begin_inset space ~
17556 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17558 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
17562 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
17563 LyX therefore uses the program
17567 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
17568 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
17569 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
17570 \begin_inset space ~
17574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17576 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
17583 \begin_layout Standard
17584 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
17587 \begin_layout Description
17589 \begin_inset space ~
17592 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
17593 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
17594 Well-known bitmap image formats are
17595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17598 Graphics Interchange Format
17599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17602 (GIF, file extension
17603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17615 \begin_inset Index idx
17618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17650 Portable Network Graphics
17651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17654 (PNG, file extension
17655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17667 \begin_inset Index idx
17670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17702 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17706 (JPG, file extension
17707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17731 \begin_inset Index idx
17734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17765 \begin_layout Description
17767 \begin_inset space ~
17770 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
17772 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
17773 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
17774 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
17775 \begin_inset Newline newline
17778 Scalable image formats can be
17779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17782 Scalable Vector Graphics
17783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17786 (SVG, file extension
17787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17799 \begin_inset Index idx
17802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17834 Encapsulated PostScript
17835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17838 (EPS, file extension
17839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17851 \begin_inset Index idx
17854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17886 Portable Document Format
17887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17890 (PDF, file extension
17891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17903 \begin_inset Index idx
17906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17921 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
17922 result will not be scalable.
17923 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
17928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17929 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
17937 \begin_layout Standard
17938 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
17945 \begin_layout Subsection
17946 Grouping of Image Settings
17947 \begin_inset Index idx
17950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17951 Images ! Settings grouping
17959 \begin_layout Standard
17960 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
17962 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
17963 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
17965 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
17966 need to manually change each of them.
17970 \begin_layout Standard
17971 A new group can be set by pressing the button
17974 \begin_inset space ~
17978 \begin_inset space ~
17993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18001 \begin_inset space ~
18005 \begin_inset space ~
18012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18022 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18023 and checking the name of the desired group.
18026 \begin_layout Section
18028 \begin_inset Index idx
18031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18038 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18047 \begin_layout Standard
18048 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18051 arg "tabular-insert"
18056 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18060 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18061 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18062 from the rest of the table.
18063 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18064 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18066 Here is an example table:
18069 \begin_layout Standard
18071 \begin_inset Tabular
18072 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18073 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
18074 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18075 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18076 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18077 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18277 \begin_layout Subsection
18281 \begin_layout Standard
18282 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18285 More\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18289 This brings up the table dialog.
18290 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18291 cursor is placed currently.
18292 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18293 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18294 done on all of your selection.
18297 \begin_layout Standard
18298 In addition to the table dialog, the
18301 \begin_inset space ~
18306 helps you in setting table properties.
18307 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18310 \begin_layout Standard
18314 \begin_inset space ~
18319 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18320 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18321 current cell respectively.
18322 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18324 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18325 of text, see section
18326 \begin_inset space ~
18330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18332 reference "sub:Table-Cells"
18339 \begin_layout Standard
18340 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18341 using the check box
18350 This will merge the cells to
18354 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
18355 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
18356 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
18357 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
18358 in the last row without the upper border:
18361 \begin_layout Standard
18363 \begin_inset Tabular
18364 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
18365 <features rotate="0" firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
18366 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18367 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
18368 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18369 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18380 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18389 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18465 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18500 \begin_layout Standard
18501 Adept users can declare special LaTeX-arguments for the table.
18502 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
18503 explained in the chapter
18510 \begin_inset space ~
18516 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table 90
18517 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18520 degrees counterclockwise.
18521 These rotations are not visible in LyX but are visible in the output.
18524 \begin_layout Standard
18525 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18533 Most DVI-viewers are
18537 able to display rotations.
18545 \begin_layout Standard
18550 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
18555 adds lines for all cell borders.
18558 \begin_layout Subsection
18560 \begin_inset Index idx
18563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18564 Tables ! Longtables
18570 \begin_inset Index idx
18573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18582 \begin_layout Standard
18583 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
18586 \begin_inset space ~
18590 \begin_inset space ~
18599 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
18600 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
18603 \begin_layout Description
18608 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
18609 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
18610 except for the first page, if
18613 \begin_inset space ~
18621 \begin_layout Description
18625 \begin_inset space ~
18630 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
18631 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
18634 \begin_layout Description
18639 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
18640 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
18641 except for the last page, if
18644 \begin_inset space ~
18652 \begin_layout Description
18656 \begin_inset space ~
18661 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
18662 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
18665 \begin_layout Description
18666 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
18667 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
18669 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18673 More about longtable captions can be found in the
18676 \begin_inset space ~
18684 \begin_layout Standard
18685 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
18686 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
18687 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
18693 In this context, first means first in this order:
18696 \begin_inset space ~
18708 \begin_inset space ~
18713 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
18716 \begin_layout Standard
18718 \begin_inset Tabular
18719 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
18720 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
18721 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
18722 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18723 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18724 <row endfirsthead="true">
18725 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18731 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
18736 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18745 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18755 <row endfirsthead="true">
18756 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18767 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18776 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18788 <row endhead="true">
18789 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18800 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18809 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18819 <row endhead="true">
18820 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18831 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18840 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18852 <row endfoot="true">
18853 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18864 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18873 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18904 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19845 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19854 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
19857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19863 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19874 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19905 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19936 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19967 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19998 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20029 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20060 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20091 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20122 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20153 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20184 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20215 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20246 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20277 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20308 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20339 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20370 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20401 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20432 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20463 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20494 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20525 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20556 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20587 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20618 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20649 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20680 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20711 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20742 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20773 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20804 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20834 <row endlastfoot="true">
20835 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20846 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20855 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20872 \begin_layout Subsection
20874 \begin_inset Index idx
20877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20884 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20886 name "sub:Table-Cells"
20893 \begin_layout Standard
20894 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
20895 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
20896 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
20897 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
20901 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
20904 \begin_layout Standard
20905 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
20906 for the column in the table dialog.
20907 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
20908 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
20912 \begin_layout Standard
20914 \begin_inset Tabular
20915 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
20916 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
20917 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20918 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
20919 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20939 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21008 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21064 This is longer now.
21069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21120 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21121 This is longer now.
21126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21152 \begin_layout Standard
21153 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21154 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21159 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21160 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21166 Selection with the mouse or with
21170 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21171 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21172 the selection from outside the table.
21175 \begin_layout Section
21177 \begin_inset Index idx
21180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21187 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21196 \begin_layout Subsection
21200 \begin_layout Standard
21201 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21202 have a fixed location.
21204 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21208 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21211 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21219 \begin_inset space ~
21224 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21225 too many notes on the current page.
21228 \begin_layout Standard
21229 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21230 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21231 and pages without text.
21232 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21233 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21234 Floats are therefore numbered.
21235 Referencing is described in section
21236 \begin_inset space ~
21240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21242 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21249 \begin_layout Standard
21250 To insert a float, use the menu
21252 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21256 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21257 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21259 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21260 \begin_inset Index idx
21263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21269 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21270 paragraph within the float.
21271 To keep your LyX-document readable, you can open and close the float box
21272 by left-clicking on the box label.
21273 A closed float box looks like this:
21274 \begin_inset Graphics
21275 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
21280 – a gray button with a red label.
21283 \begin_layout Standard
21284 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible LaTeX-errors
21285 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21288 \begin_layout Subsection
21292 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21294 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21296 name "sub:Figure-Floats"
21301 \begin_inset Index idx
21304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21305 Floats ! Figure floats
21313 \begin_layout Standard
21315 \begin_inset space ~
21319 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21321 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21325 was created using the menu
21327 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21328 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21334 arg "float-insert figure"
21338 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21341 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21347 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21351 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21352 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
21354 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21356 \begin_inset space ~
21364 arg "layout-paragraph"
21370 \begin_layout Standard
21371 \begin_inset Float figure
21376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21378 \begin_inset Graphics
21379 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21389 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21392 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21394 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21398 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
21411 \begin_layout Standard
21412 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
21413 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
21415 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21424 ) and refer to it using the menu
21426 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21432 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
21436 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
21437 vague references like
21438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21445 , because, as LaTeX will reposition the floats in the final document, it
21447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21455 For more about cross-references, see section
21456 \begin_inset space ~
21460 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21462 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21469 \begin_layout Standard
21470 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
21471 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
21472 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
21473 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
21474 as described in section
21475 \begin_inset space ~
21479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21481 reference "sub:List-of-Figures"
21487 \begin_inset space ~
21491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21493 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
21497 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
21498 You can also set the images one below the other.
21500 \begin_inset space ~
21504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21506 reference "fig:Undefinable"
21511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21513 reference "fig:Platypus"
21517 are the subfigures.
21520 \begin_layout Standard
21521 \begin_inset Float figure
21526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21527 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21531 \begin_inset Float figure
21536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21537 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21540 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21542 name "fig:Undefinable"
21554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21555 \begin_inset Graphics
21556 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
21567 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21571 \begin_inset Float figure
21576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21577 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21580 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21582 name "fig:Platypus"
21594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21595 \begin_inset Graphics
21596 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21608 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21615 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21618 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21620 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
21624 Two distorted images.
21637 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21639 \begin_inset Index idx
21642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21643 Floats ! Table floats
21651 \begin_layout Standard
21652 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
21654 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21655 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21658 or the toolbar button
21661 arg "float-insert table"
21665 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
21666 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
21667 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
21669 \begin_inset space ~
21673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21675 reference "tab:Table-float"
21682 \begin_layout Standard
21683 \begin_inset Float table
21688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21689 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21692 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21694 name "tab:Table-float"
21706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21708 \begin_inset Tabular
21709 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
21710 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
21711 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21712 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21713 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21840 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
21848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21861 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
21864 \end{array}\right]$
21872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21885 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
21906 \begin_layout Subsection
21908 \begin_inset Index idx
21911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21920 \begin_layout Standard
21921 LyX offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
21922 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
21923 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
21925 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
21933 \begin_inset space ~
21941 \begin_layout Section
21943 \begin_inset Index idx
21946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21955 \begin_layout Standard
21956 LaTeX provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
21958 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
21959 \begin_inset space \space{}
21966 \begin_layout Standard
21967 Minipages in LyX have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
21969 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21973 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
21974 and its alignment within the page.
21977 \begin_layout Standard
21979 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21989 height_special "totalheight"
21992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21995 This is a minipage.
21996 The text is set in an italic style.
21999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22002 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22003 another formatting.
22011 \begin_layout Standard
22012 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22015 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22019 as described in section
22020 \begin_inset space ~
22024 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22026 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
22031 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22037 \begin_layout Standard
22038 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22048 height_special "totalheight"
22051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22052 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22053 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22059 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22063 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22073 height_special "totalheight"
22076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22077 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22078 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22086 \begin_layout Standard
22087 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22093 \begin_layout Standard
22094 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22096 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22103 \begin_inset space ~
22111 \begin_layout Chapter
22112 Mathematical Formulas
22113 \begin_inset Index idx
22116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22123 \begin_inset Index idx
22126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22155 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22157 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22164 \begin_layout Standard
22165 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22170 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22173 \begin_layout Section
22175 \begin_inset Index idx
22178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22187 \begin_layout Standard
22188 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22201 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22203 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22204 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22205 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22207 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22213 \begin_layout Standard
22214 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22218 \begin_inset space ~
22223 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22226 \begin_layout Standard
22227 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22228 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22231 \begin_layout Standard
22232 This is a line with an inline formula
22233 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22239 \begin_layout Standard
22240 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22241 paragraph, like this one:
22242 \begin_inset Formula
22249 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22252 \begin_layout Standard
22253 LyX also supports many LaTeX math commands.
22254 For example, typing
22255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22268 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22269 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22273 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22276 \begin_inset space ~
22284 \begin_layout Subsection
22285 Navigating in Formulas
22286 \begin_inset Index idx
22289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22298 \begin_layout Standard
22299 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22300 achieved with the arrow keys.
22301 LyX uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22302 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22307 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22308 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22312 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22316 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22319 \end{array}\right]$
22327 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22332 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22333 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22336 \begin_layout Standard
22341 , printed in this document as
22342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22363 \begin_inset Note Note
22366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22367 This command will appear in the output as an official character denoting
22368 the space character (visible space).
22373 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22374 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22375 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
22380 For example, if you want
22381 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
22392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22435 , since in the latter case only the
22438 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
22443 will be under the square root sign:
22444 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
22450 \begin_layout Standard
22451 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
22453 \begin_inset Formula
22455 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
22464 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
22465 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
22468 \begin_layout Subsection
22472 \begin_layout Standard
22473 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
22474 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
22478 and a cursor movement key to select text.
22479 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
22480 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
22481 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
22482 but not in a normal text region in LyX.
22485 \begin_layout Subsection
22486 Exponents and Subscripts
22487 \begin_inset Index idx
22490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22497 \begin_inset Index idx
22500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22509 \begin_layout Standard
22510 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
22513 arg "math-superscript"
22519 arg "math-subscript"
22522 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
22524 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
22527 , type in a formula
22533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22549 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
22555 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
22559 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
22568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22580 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
22582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22589 , you have to use an extra
22593 to separate the circumflex and the character.
22594 For example, if you want
22595 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
22604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22616 Subscripts are similar: To get
22617 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
22626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22640 \begin_layout Subsection
22642 \begin_inset Index idx
22645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22654 \begin_layout Standard
22655 Create a fraction either with the command
22661 or by using the icon
22664 arg "math-insert \\frac"
22670 \begin_inset space ~
22676 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
22677 The cursor is above the fraction line.
22678 To move it to the bottom, simply press
22683 To move back up, press
22688 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
22689 \begin_inset Formula
22691 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
22694 \end{array}\right)}\right]
22702 \begin_layout Subsection
22704 \begin_inset Index idx
22707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22716 \begin_layout Standard
22717 Roots can be created using the
22720 \begin_inset space ~
22728 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
22734 arg "math-insert \\root"
22756 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
22762 always produces a square root.
22765 \begin_layout Subsection
22766 Operators with Limits
22767 \begin_inset Index idx
22770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22777 \begin_inset Index idx
22780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22787 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22789 name "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
22796 \begin_layout Standard
22798 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
22802 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
22805 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
22806 These limits can be entered in LyX by entering them as you would enter
22807 a super- or subscript, directly after the symbol.
22808 The sum operator will automatically place its
22809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22816 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
22818 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
22822 \begin_inset Formula
22824 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
22829 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
22833 \begin_layout Standard
22834 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
22836 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
22837 behind the operator and using the menu
22839 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22840 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22842 \begin_inset space ~
22846 \begin_inset space ~
22860 \begin_layout Standard
22861 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
22862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22870 \begin_inset Index idx
22873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22880 \begin_inset Formula
22882 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
22887 which will place the
22888 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
22892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22900 In inline formulas it looks like this:
22901 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
22907 \begin_layout Standard
22908 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
22915 Have a look at section
22916 \begin_inset space ~
22920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22922 reference "sub:Functions"
22926 for an explanation of function macros.
22929 \begin_layout Subsection
22931 \begin_inset Index idx
22934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22943 \begin_layout Standard
22944 Most math symbols can be found in the
22947 \begin_inset space ~
22952 under one of several categories; including
22969 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
22973 \begin_layout Standard
22974 If you know the LaTeX-command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
22975 you don't have to use the
22978 \begin_inset space ~
22983 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
22984 LyX will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
22987 \begin_layout Subsection
22989 \begin_inset Index idx
22992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23001 \begin_layout Standard
23002 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23007 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
23013 \begin_inset space ~
23023 arg "math-insert \\space"
23029 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23030 For example, the sequence
23035 \begin_inset Formula $a\, b$
23039 \begin_inset Graphics
23040 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23045 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23046 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23047 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23048 Some markers for the space size appear red in LyX, because they are negative
23050 Here are two examples:
23053 \begin_layout Standard
23063 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23069 \begin_layout Standard
23079 \begin_inset Formula $a\! b$
23085 \begin_layout Subsection
23087 \begin_inset Index idx
23090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23097 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23099 name "sub:Functions"
23106 \begin_layout Standard
23110 \begin_inset space ~
23115 contains under the button
23120 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23125 a number of function macros, such as
23126 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23130 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23138 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23145 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23146 avoid confusions, because
23147 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23151 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23157 \begin_layout Standard
23158 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23160 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23164 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23170 \begin_layout Standard
23171 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23172 are placed, as described in section
23173 \begin_inset space ~
23177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23179 reference "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23186 \begin_layout Subsection
23188 \begin_inset Index idx
23191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23200 \begin_layout Standard
23201 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23203 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23204 You can also use LaTeX commands, for example, to enter
23205 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23208 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23209 Our example is entered by typing
23217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23230 \begin_inset space ~
23234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23236 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23240 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23243 \begin_layout Standard
23244 \begin_inset Float table
23249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23250 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23253 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23255 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23259 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23269 \begin_inset Tabular
23270 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23271 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
23272 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23273 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23274 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23358 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23412 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23466 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
23476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23520 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
23530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23574 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
23584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23628 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
23638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23682 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
23692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23736 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
23746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23790 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
23800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23835 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
23856 \begin_layout Standard
23857 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
23860 \begin_inset space ~
23868 arg "math-insert \\hat"
23871 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
23875 \begin_layout Section
23876 Brackets and Delimiters
23877 \begin_inset Index idx
23880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23887 \begin_inset Index idx
23890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23897 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23899 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
23906 \begin_layout Standard
23907 There are several brackets available through LyX.
23908 For some purposes, using just the keys
23913 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
23914 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
23915 toolbar delimiter icon
23918 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
23922 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
23923 \begin_inset Formula
23925 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
23933 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
23934 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
23938 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
23941 and the expression on the right was entered using the
23947 \begin_inset Formula
23949 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
23957 \begin_layout Standard
23958 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
23959 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
23963 \begin_layout Standard
23964 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
23965 left side and right side.
23966 If you use the option
23969 \begin_inset space ~
23974 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
23975 The selection will be shown as TeX code.
23976 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
23981 It will appear in LyX with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
23984 \begin_layout Standard
23985 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
23986 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
23987 is to go inside the brackets.
23988 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
23993 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
23994 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
23995 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
23999 arg "math-delim ( )"
24005 \begin_layout Section
24006 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24007 \begin_inset Index idx
24010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24017 \begin_inset Index idx
24020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24027 \begin_inset Index idx
24030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24031 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24039 \begin_layout Standard
24040 Matrices are entered in LyX using the
24043 \begin_inset space ~
24053 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24059 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24060 Here is an example:
24061 \begin_inset Formula
24063 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24072 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24073 \begin_inset space ~
24077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24079 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24084 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24085 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24086 This alignment is set in the box
24091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24139 for every column as default.
24140 For example, the sequence
24141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24152 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24153 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24154 corresponds to the relevant column.
24155 The result will look like this:
24156 \begin_inset Formula
24159 this & this\, column & this\, column\\
24160 column & has & has\, right\\
24161 has\, left\, alignment & center\, alignment & alignment
24170 \begin_layout Standard
24171 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24174 arg "newline-insert newline"
24177 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24178 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24180 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24183 or the math toolbar.
24186 \begin_layout Standard
24187 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24188 It can be created with the menu
24190 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24191 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24193 \begin_inset space ~
24205 Here is an example:
24206 \begin_inset Formula
24220 \begin_layout Standard
24221 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24224 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24227 arg "newline-insert newline"
24231 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24236 arg "newline-insert newline"
24239 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24247 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24248 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24249 A new row is created by every further entry of
24252 arg "newline-insert newline"
24256 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24257 Here is an example:
24258 \begin_inset Formula
24260 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24261 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24266 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24267 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24268 \begin_inset Formula
24270 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24278 \begin_layout Standard
24279 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24286 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24287 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24290 reference "eq:asquared"
24295 The other types are described in section
24296 \begin_inset space ~
24300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24302 reference "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
24309 \begin_layout Section
24310 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24311 \begin_inset Index idx
24314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24315 Math ! Formula numbering
24321 \begin_inset Index idx
24324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24325 Math ! Referencing formulas
24331 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24333 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24340 \begin_layout Standard
24341 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24343 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24344 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24346 \begin_inset space ~
24350 \begin_inset space ~
24358 arg "math-number-toggle"
24362 The formula number appears in LyX within parentheses.
24363 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24364 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24365 the document class.
24366 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24367 separated by a dot:
24368 \begin_inset Formula
24378 arg "math-number-toggle"
24381 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24382 You can only number displayed formulas.
24385 \begin_layout Standard
24386 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24388 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24389 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24391 \begin_inset space ~
24395 \begin_inset space ~
24403 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24406 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24407 \begin_inset Formula
24410 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24416 To number all lines use the shortcut
24419 arg "math-number-toggle"
24425 \begin_layout Standard
24426 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24429 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24430 A label is inserted with the menu
24432 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24441 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24442 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24443 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24455 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24456 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24457 We inserted in the following example the label
24458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24465 in the second line:
24466 \begin_inset Formula
24468 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
24469 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
24474 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
24475 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
24476 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
24478 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24480 \begin_inset space ~
24488 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24492 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
24493 The reference appears in LyX as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
24494 as the formula number:
24497 \begin_layout Standard
24498 This is a cross-reference to equation (
24499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24501 reference "eq:tanhExp"
24508 \begin_layout Standard
24509 The properties of LyX's cross-reference box are described in section
24510 \begin_inset space ~
24514 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24516 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24521 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
24529 \begin_layout Section
24530 User defined math macros
24531 \begin_inset Index idx
24534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24543 \begin_layout Standard
24544 LyX allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
24545 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
24546 Math macros are explained in section
24549 \begin_inset space ~
24561 \begin_layout Section
24565 \begin_layout Subsection
24567 \begin_inset Index idx
24570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24579 \begin_layout Standard
24580 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
24581 To set a font in a formula, use the
24584 \begin_inset space ~
24594 arg "math-insert \\font"
24599 , or enter its command, listed in table
24600 \begin_inset space ~
24604 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24606 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
24613 \begin_layout Standard
24614 \begin_inset Float table
24619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24620 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24623 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24625 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
24629 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
24637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24639 \begin_inset Tabular
24640 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
24641 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
24642 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24643 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24675 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
24683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24702 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
24710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24729 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
24737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24762 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
24770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24789 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
24797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24816 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
24824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24850 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
24858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24877 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
24885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24911 \begin_layout Standard
24912 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
24915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24920 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
24936 \begin_layout Standard
24937 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
24938 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
24943 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
24944 space when you need a space in the box.
24945 Here is an example where
24946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24957 denotes the set of numbers:
24958 \begin_inset Formula
24960 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\: x\in\mathbb{N}
24968 \begin_layout Standard
24969 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
24970 You can, for example, put a character in
24979 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
24983 \begin_inset Newline newline
24986 So it is better not to use this feature.
24989 \begin_layout Standard
24990 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
24991 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
24995 \begin_inset Newline newline
24998 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25004 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25005 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25011 \begin_layout Standard
25018 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25021 \begin_layout Standard
25022 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25024 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25025 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25027 \begin_inset space ~
25035 \begin_layout Subsection
25037 \begin_inset Index idx
25040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25049 \begin_layout Standard
25050 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25052 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25056 \begin_inset space ~
25060 \begin_inset space ~
25068 \begin_inset space ~
25078 arg "math-insert \\font"
25090 Math text appears in LyX in black instead of blue.
25091 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25092 Here is an example:
25093 \begin_inset Formula
25096 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25097 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25106 \begin_layout Subsection
25108 \begin_inset Index idx
25111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25120 \begin_layout Standard
25121 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25122 automatically chosen in most situations.
25140 For most characters,
25148 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25149 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25154 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25155 situations, all text will be set in the styles that LaTeX thinks are appropriat
25157 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25162 arg "math-insert \\style"
25168 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25169 For example, you can set
25170 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25173 , which is normally in
25182 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25186 The four styles are used in the following example:
25189 \begin_layout Standard
25190 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25194 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25198 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25202 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25208 \begin_layout Standard
25209 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25210 is set in a particular size with the menu
25212 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25214 \begin_inset space ~
25219 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25220 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25221 will be adjusted to correspond.
25222 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25233 \begin_layout Standard
25237 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25243 \begin_layout Section
25245 \begin_inset Index idx
25248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25255 \begin_inset Index idx
25258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25267 \begin_layout Standard
25268 LyX supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society
25269 (AMS) that are in common use.
25272 \begin_layout Subsection
25273 Enabling AMS-Support
25276 \begin_layout Standard
25277 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25278 the document by selecting the checkbox
25281 \begin_inset space ~
25285 \begin_inset space ~
25289 \begin_inset space ~
25296 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25300 \begin_inset Index idx
25303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25304 Document ! Settings
25312 \begin_inset space ~
25318 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get LaTeX-errors in
25319 formulas, ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25322 \begin_layout Subsection
25324 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25326 name "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
25331 \begin_inset Index idx
25334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25335 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25343 \begin_layout Standard
25344 AMS-LaTeX provides a selection of different formula types.
25345 LyX allows you to choose between
25366 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25367 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25373 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25376 \begin_layout Chapter
25380 \begin_layout Section
25382 \begin_inset Index idx
25385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25392 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25394 name "sec:Cross-References"
25401 \begin_layout Standard
25402 One of LyX's strengths is cross-references.
25403 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25405 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25406 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25407 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25410 \begin_layout Enumerate
25414 \begin_layout Enumerate
25415 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25417 name "enu:Second-item"
25424 \begin_layout Enumerate
25428 \begin_layout Standard
25429 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25431 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25434 or by pressing the toolbar button
25441 A gray label box like this:
25442 \begin_inset Graphics
25443 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
25448 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25449 LyX offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25484 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
25485 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
25487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25501 \begin_layout Standard
25502 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
25504 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25507 or the toolbar button
25510 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25514 A gray cross-reference box like this:
25515 \begin_inset Graphics
25516 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
25521 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
25523 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
25524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25536 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
25540 \begin_layout Standard
25541 As an alternative to
25543 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25546 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
25551 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
25552 to the actual cursor position via the menu
25554 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25566 \begin_layout Standard
25567 Here is our cross-reference: Item
25568 \begin_inset space ~
25572 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25574 reference "enu:Second-item"
25581 \begin_layout Standard
25582 It is recommended to use a protected space
25586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25587 described in section
25588 \begin_inset space ~
25592 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25594 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
25603 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
25604 line breaks between them.
25607 \begin_layout Standard
25608 There are six formats of cross-references:
25611 \begin_layout Description
25612 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
25613 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25615 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25622 \begin_layout Description
25623 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
25624 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
25626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25636 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25643 \begin_layout Description
25644 <page>: prints the page number: Page
25645 \begin_inset space ~
25649 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25650 LatexCommand pageref
25651 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25658 \begin_layout Description
25660 \begin_inset space ~
25664 \begin_inset space ~
25667 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
25668 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25669 LatexCommand vpageref
25670 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25675 \begin_inset Newline newline
25678 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
25679 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
25680 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
25681 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
25682 it prints “on the next page”.
25683 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
25686 \begin_layout Description
25688 \begin_inset space ~
25692 \begin_inset space ~
25696 \begin_inset space ~
25699 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
25700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25702 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25707 \begin_inset Newline newline
25710 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
25716 ; otherwise it behaves like
25720 \begin_inset space ~
25724 \begin_inset space ~
25733 \begin_layout Description
25735 \begin_inset space ~
25738 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
25739 \begin_inset Newline newline
25743 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25751 This feature is only available when you have the LaTeX-package
25760 \begin_inset Index idx
25763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25764 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
25770 \begin_inset Index idx
25773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25774 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
25785 \begin_inset Newline newline
25788 You can select which LaTeX-package should be used for this feature by setting
25791 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
25795 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25796 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25804 is the default and preferred because
25808 supports only English documents.
25809 The format is specified by using the command
25821 (refstyle) in the LaTeX preamble of the document.
25822 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
25824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25835 ) can be done with this command
25836 \begin_inset Newline newline
25843 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
25848 \begin_inset Newline newline
25851 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
25853 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25855 key "prettyref,refstyle"
25862 \begin_layout Description
25864 \begin_inset space ~
25867 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
25868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25869 LatexCommand nameref
25870 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25877 \begin_layout Standard
25878 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
25879 is automatically calculated by LaTeX.
25880 The varieties are adjusted in the field
25884 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
25888 \begin_layout Standard
25889 You can only use the style
25893 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
25897 is always possible.
25900 \begin_layout Standard
25901 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
25902 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
25904 Referencing formulas is explained in section
25905 \begin_inset space ~
25909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25911 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
25918 \begin_layout Standard
25919 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
25923 \begin_inset space ~
25927 \begin_inset space ~
25932 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
25933 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
25936 \begin_inset space ~
25941 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
25942 You can also go back with the toolbar button
25945 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
25951 \begin_layout Standard
25952 You can change labels at any time.
25953 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
25954 do not need to think about this.
25957 \begin_layout Standard
25958 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in LyX
25959 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output
25960 instead of the reference.
25963 \begin_layout Standard
25964 References are described in detail in the section
25965 \begin_inset space ~
25969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25979 \begin_inset space ~
25987 \begin_layout Section
25988 Table of Contents and other Listings
25989 \begin_inset Index idx
25992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25999 \begin_inset Index idx
26002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26009 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26018 \begin_layout Subsection
26020 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26022 name "sub:Table-of-Contents"
26029 \begin_layout Standard
26030 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26032 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26033 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26035 \begin_inset space ~
26039 \begin_inset space ~
26045 It is displayed in LyX as a gray box.
26046 If you click on it, the
26050 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26051 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26052 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26054 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26057 that is described in section
26058 \begin_inset space ~
26062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26064 reference "sub:The-Outliner"
26071 \begin_layout Standard
26072 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26073 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26075 \begin_inset space ~
26079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26081 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26085 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26087 \begin_inset space ~
26091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26093 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
26097 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26099 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26102 \begin_layout Subsection
26103 List of Figures, Tables, and Algorithms
26104 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26106 name "sub:List-of-Figures"
26113 \begin_layout Standard
26114 Table, figure, and algorithm lists are very much like the table of contents.
26115 You can insert them via the
26117 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26121 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26124 \begin_layout Section
26125 URLs and Hyperlinks
26126 \begin_inset Index idx
26129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26136 \begin_inset Index idx
26139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26148 \begin_layout Subsection
26150 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26159 \begin_layout Standard
26160 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26162 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26168 \begin_layout Standard
26169 Here is an example URL: LyX's homepage:
26170 \begin_inset Flex URL
26173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26183 \begin_layout Standard
26184 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26190 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26194 \begin_layout Standard
26195 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26203 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get LaTeX errors.
26211 \begin_layout Subsection
26213 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26215 name "sub:Hyperlinks"
26222 \begin_layout Standard
26223 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26225 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26228 or with the toolbar button
26235 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26244 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26245 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26246 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26248 name "LyX's homepage"
26249 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26253 , an Email address like this:
26254 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26256 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26257 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26262 , or a link to a file.
26265 \begin_layout Standard
26266 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26279 to the link target.
26282 \begin_layout Standard
26283 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26284 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26285 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26286 the text style dialog.
26287 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26291 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26293 name "LyX's homepage"
26294 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26301 \begin_layout Standard
26302 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26306 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26308 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26309 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26313 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26315 \begin_inset Newline newline
26323 \begin_inset Newline newline
26330 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26333 \begin_layout Section
26335 \begin_inset Index idx
26338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26345 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26347 name "sec:Appendices"
26354 \begin_layout Standard
26355 Appendices are created with the menu
26357 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26359 \begin_inset space ~
26363 \begin_inset space ~
26369 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26370 as the appendix part of the book.
26371 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26374 \begin_layout Standard
26375 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26376 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26377 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26378 and the subsection number.
26379 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26383 \begin_layout Standard
26385 \begin_inset space ~
26389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26391 reference "chap:Credits"
26396 \begin_inset space ~
26400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26402 reference "sub:Export"
26409 \begin_layout Section
26411 \begin_inset Index idx
26414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26421 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26423 name "sec:Bibliography"
26430 \begin_layout Standard
26431 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a LyX-document.
26432 You can include a bibliography database,
26436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26437 Known under the name
26438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26450 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26451 manually, using the paragraph environment
26455 , which was described in section
26456 \begin_inset space ~
26460 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26462 reference "sub:Biblio_environment"
26467 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
26468 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
26472 use a bibliography database.
26475 \begin_layout Subsection
26476 The Bibliography Environment
26479 \begin_layout Standard
26484 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
26486 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
26495 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
26497 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about LaTeX
26499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26506 , a short form of its title, as the key.
26509 \begin_layout Standard
26510 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
26512 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26515 or the toolbar button
26518 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
26522 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
26523 containing the available citations.
26524 Select one or more keys from the list and
26534 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
26535 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
26539 \begin_layout Standard
26540 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
26541 entry with surrounding brackets.
26546 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
26547 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
26549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26559 \begin_layout Standard
26562 LaTeX Companion Second Edition
26565 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26567 key "latexcompanion"
26574 \begin_layout Standard
26575 The LyX-Team members are listed in the Credits:
26576 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26585 \begin_layout Standard
26586 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
26589 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26591 \begin_inset space ~
26599 arg "layout-paragraph"
26603 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
26606 \begin_layout Subsection
26607 Bibliography databases (BibTeX)
26608 \begin_inset Index idx
26611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26612 Bibliography ! Databases
26618 \begin_inset Index idx
26621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26622 Bibliography ! BibTeX
26628 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26630 name "sub:Bibliography-databases"
26637 \begin_layout Standard
26638 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
26643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26644 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
26646 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
26647 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
26652 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
26654 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
26655 your working field in a database.
26656 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
26657 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
26658 list for that document.
26659 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
26663 \begin_layout Standard
26664 The database is a text file with the file extension
26665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26676 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
26677 The format is explained in
26678 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26684 and in the LaTeX books (
26685 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26687 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
26692 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
26693 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
26694 A list of such programs is maintained on the LyX Wiki at
26695 \begin_inset Flex URL
26698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26700 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
26708 \begin_layout Standard
26709 To use a database, use the menu
26711 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26716 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26729 \begin_inset space ~
26735 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
26736 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
26743 Add bibliography to TOC
26745 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
26750 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
26751 in the document or just the cited references.
26754 \begin_layout Standard
26755 The style file is a text file with the file extension
26756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26767 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
26768 Your LaTeX distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
26769 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
26771 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
26776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26777 For information on how this is done, have a look at
26778 \begin_inset Newline newline
26782 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26784 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
26796 \begin_layout Standard
26797 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
26800 \begin_layout Standard
26801 To generate the bibliography from a database, LyX uses the program BibTeX.
26802 You can choose which of its variants should be used by LyX as the
26808 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26809 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26814 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26815 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26816 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26831 The following variants are possible:
26834 \begin_layout Description
26835 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
26836 with other bibliography packages (e.
26837 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
26841 \begin_inset space \space{}
26848 ), only with the package
26852 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
26856 \begin_layout Description
26857 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
26858 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
26859 with all bibliography packages, except
26864 \begin_layout Description
26865 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
26870 , works with all bibliography packages
26873 \begin_layout Standard
26874 BibTeX can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
26876 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
26882 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26891 \begin_layout Standard
26892 When you select the option
26894 Sectioned bibliography
26898 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26899 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26902 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
26903 This and other options are explained in detail in section
26905 Customizing Bibliographies
26913 Additional Features
26918 \begin_layout Standard
26919 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
26920 the two methods of creating them.
26921 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
26922 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
26923 We used the style file
26927 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
26930 \begin_layout Subsection
26931 Bibliography layout
26932 \begin_inset Index idx
26935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26936 Bibliography ! Layout
26944 \begin_layout Standard
26945 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
26946 For this feature you need to enable the option
26952 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26956 \begin_inset Index idx
26959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26960 Document ! Settings
26970 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
26971 For the global citation format use the BibTeX style files as explained
26972 in the previous section.
26975 \begin_layout Standard
26976 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
26977 the citation reference window.
26978 Here is an example where the text
26979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26983 \begin_inset space ~
26987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26990 appears after the reference:
26993 \begin_layout Standard
26995 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26998 key "latexcompanion"
27005 \begin_layout Section
27007 \begin_inset Index idx
27010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27017 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27026 \begin_layout Standard
27027 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27029 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27031 \begin_inset space ~
27036 or the toolbar button
27043 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27044 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27045 by LyX as the index entry.
27048 \begin_layout Standard
27049 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27051 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27052 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27054 \begin_inset space ~
27060 A light blue box labeled
27061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27072 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27073 The index list box is not clickable like other LyX-boxes.
27076 \begin_layout Standard
27077 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27078 For a detailed description of LaTeX's index mechanism, have a look at one
27080 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27082 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27089 \begin_layout Subsection
27090 Grouping Index Entries
27091 \begin_inset Index idx
27094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27103 \begin_layout Standard
27104 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27106 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27107 lists under the entry
27108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27116 First we create the entry
27117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27125 \begin_inset space ~
27129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27131 reference "sub:Lists"
27136 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27137 \begin_inset space ~
27141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27143 reference "sec:Itemize"
27147 , we insert the command
27150 \begin_layout Standard
27156 \begin_layout Standard
27160 \begin_layout Standard
27166 \begin_layout Standard
27167 for the enumerated list in section
27168 \begin_inset space ~
27172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27174 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27181 \begin_layout Standard
27182 The exclamation mark
27183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27190 marks the grouping levels.
27191 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27192 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27193 If we don't have an index entry for
27194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27201 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27204 \begin_layout Subsection
27206 \begin_inset Index idx
27209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27210 Index ! Page ranges
27218 \begin_layout Standard
27219 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27221 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27222 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27223 an index entry in section
27224 \begin_inset space ~
27228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27230 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27237 \begin_layout Standard
27240 Paragraph environments|(
27243 \begin_layout Standard
27244 and another entry at the end of section
27245 \begin_inset space ~
27249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27251 reference "sub:LyX-Code"
27258 \begin_layout Standard
27261 Paragraph environments|)
27264 \begin_layout Standard
27266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27289 respectively start and end the index range.
27290 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27291 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27292 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27293 An example is the index entry
27294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27297 Document ! Settings
27298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27304 \begin_layout Subsection
27306 \begin_inset Index idx
27309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27310 Index ! Cross referencing
27318 \begin_layout Standard
27319 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27320 We referred for example in the index entry
27321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27329 \begin_inset space ~
27333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27335 reference "sub:Image-Formats"
27339 ) to the index entry
27340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27347 in the same section using the entry
27350 \begin_layout Standard
27353 GIF|see{Image formats}
27356 \begin_layout Standard
27357 where the braces have to be inserted as TeX Code.
27358 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27359 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27362 \begin_layout Subsection
27364 \begin_inset Index idx
27367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27368 Index ! Entry order
27376 \begin_layout Standard
27377 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27378 follow the rules for the index order.
27379 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but LaTeX
27383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27384 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27386 \begin_inset space ~
27390 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27392 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27401 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27402 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27427 \begin_inset Index idx
27430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27431 Dummy entries ! maïs
27437 \begin_inset Index idx
27440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27441 Dummy entries ! maître
27447 \begin_inset Index idx
27450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27451 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
27456 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
27457 maïs, maison, maître.
27458 To achieve this, we use the command
27461 \begin_layout Standard
27464 previous entry@current entry
27467 \begin_layout Standard
27468 In our case we want to have
27469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27484 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
27487 \begin_layout Standard
27493 \begin_layout Standard
27494 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
27495 You can also use another word to tell LaTeX the entry order.
27496 See the next subsection for an example.
27499 \begin_layout Standard
27500 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27506 \begin_layout Standard
27507 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
27512 to generate the index (see sec.
27513 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27519 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27528 would for example print the index entry for the LaTeX-package aeguill in
27530 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27536 reference "sub:Document-Font"
27540 after the index entries of the other LaTeX-packages although all these
27541 index commands start with
27542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27554 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
27559 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
27562 \begin_layout Standard
27574 \begin_layout Standard
27586 \begin_layout Subsection
27588 \begin_inset Index idx
27591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27592 Index ! Entry layout
27600 \begin_layout Standard
27601 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
27602 \begin_inset Index idx
27605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27608 This is an italic dummy entry
27613 You can also format the page number using the character
27614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27621 followed by a LaTeX-command without a backslash.
27622 We can write for example
27625 \begin_layout Standard
27628 italic page number:|textit
27631 \begin_layout Standard
27632 to get the page number in italic.
27633 \begin_inset Index idx
27636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27637 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
27642 Normally all LaTeX-commands begin with a backslash, but in this special
27644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27660 \begin_inset space ~
27666 Have a look at section
27667 \begin_inset space ~
27671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27673 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
27677 to learn more about the LaTeX-syntax.
27680 \begin_layout Standard
27681 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27689 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
27693 to generate the index, see sec.
27694 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27700 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27709 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
27714 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
27715 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27718 key "latexcompanion"
27730 \begin_layout Standard
27731 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
27733 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
27734 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
27735 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
27736 If so, put the following in the preamble
27739 \begin_layout Standard
27751 \begin_layout Standard
27755 \begin_layout Standard
27761 \begin_layout Standard
27762 in the index entry.
27763 \begin_inset Index idx
27766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27767 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
27772 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
27773 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
27774 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
27777 \begin_layout Standard
27778 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
27779 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
27780 a bold font for all index entries.
27781 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
27793 documentation for details,
27794 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27796 key "makeindex,xindy"
27803 \begin_layout Subsection
27805 \begin_inset Index idx
27808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27815 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27817 name "sub:Index-Program"
27824 \begin_layout Standard
27825 If the index generation program
27829 is installed, LyX uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
27833 , the program that is part of every LaTeX distribution, is used.
27837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27842 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
27843 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
27844 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
27845 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
27846 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
27856 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in LyX's preferences
27857 dialog, see section
27858 \begin_inset space ~
27862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27864 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
27869 The available options are listed and explained in
27870 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27872 key "makeindex,xindy"
27877 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
27881 \begin_layout Standard
27882 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
27883 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar \slash{}
27886 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27887 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27891 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
27892 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
27895 \begin_layout Subsection
27899 \begin_layout Standard
27900 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
27901 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
27902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27909 next to the standard index.
27910 LaTeX does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
27911 that add this feature.
27917 \begin_inset Index idx
27920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27921 LaTeX-packages ! splitidx
27926 package to generate multiple indexes.
27927 The package is included in all recent LaTeX distributions.
27931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27932 If yours does not ship it, consult the TeX-catalogue,
27933 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27940 Note that the package does not only consist of a LaTeX style, but it also
27941 includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
27942 Please consult the package's manual for details.
27950 \begin_layout Standard
27951 To set up LyX for the use of multiple indexes, go to
27953 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27954 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27957 and select the option
27959 Use multiple Indexes
27966 already contains the standard index
27967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27975 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
27976 also appear as a heading) to the
27980 input field and press the
27985 The new index now also appears in the list.
27986 If you like, you can attribute an alternative LyX label color to the new
27990 \begin_layout Standard
27991 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
27994 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28001 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28002 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28003 are additional features:
28006 \begin_layout Itemize
28007 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28008 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28011 \begin_layout Itemize
28012 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28013 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28021 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28022 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28023 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28024 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28027 \begin_layout Section
28028 Nomenclature/Glossary
28029 \begin_inset Index idx
28032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28039 \begin_inset Index idx
28042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28071 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28073 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28080 \begin_layout Standard
28081 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28082 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28083 called nomenclature or glossary.
28086 \begin_layout Standard
28087 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the LaTeX package
28093 \begin_inset Index idx
28096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28097 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
28103 You find it in the TeX-catalogue,
28104 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28110 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
28113 \begin_layout Standard
28114 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28115 and then use the menu
28117 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28123 \begin_inset space ~
28128 or the toolbar button
28131 arg "nomencl-insert"
28136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28147 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28150 \begin_layout Standard
28151 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28152 The first is the term or
28156 that you wish to define.
28161 of the term or symbol.
28164 \begin_layout Standard
28165 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28173 You have to enter valid LaTeX-code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28181 \begin_layout Subsection
28182 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28183 \begin_inset Index idx
28186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28187 Nomenclature ! Layout
28195 \begin_layout Standard
28196 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28200 field as LaTeX-formulas.
28202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28206 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28214 \begin_inset Newline newline
28222 \begin_inset Newline newline
28228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28235 character starts/ends the formula.
28236 The LaTeX-command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning
28238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28248 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28258 \begin_layout Standard
28259 (A short introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
28260 \begin_inset space ~
28264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28266 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28273 \begin_layout Standard
28277 \begin_inset space ~
28282 dialog to format the description text; you have to use LaTeX-commands.
28283 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28288 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28295 in this document is:
28296 \begin_inset Newline newline
28301 dummy entry for the character
28306 \begin_inset Newline newline
28318 \begin_inset space ~
28328 font use the command
28357 \begin_layout Standard
28358 If the characters |
28359 \begin_inset space \space{}
28363 \begin_inset space \space{}
28367 \begin_inset space \space{}
28371 \begin_inset space \space{}
28375 \begin_inset space \space{}
28378 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28379 a quote character in front of them.
28380 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28381 LatexCommand nomenclature
28382 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28383 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
28390 \begin_layout Subsection
28391 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28392 \begin_inset Index idx
28395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28396 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28404 \begin_layout Standard
28405 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the LaTeX-code of
28406 the symbol definition.
28407 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
28409 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
28412 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28413 LatexCommand nomenclature
28415 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
28422 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28426 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28427 LatexCommand nomenclature
28430 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
28435 They will be sorted by
28436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28462 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28465 will be sorted before the
28469 since the character
28470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28477 is considered in sorting.
28480 \begin_layout Standard
28481 To control the sort order, you can edit the
28484 \begin_inset space ~
28489 field of the nomenclature dialog.
28490 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
28492 For the example given, you can insert
28496 in this field for the
28497 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28504 will be located before
28505 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28511 \begin_layout Standard
28512 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
28517 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28526 \begin_layout Subsection
28527 Nomenclature Options
28528 \begin_inset Index idx
28531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28532 Nomenclature ! Options
28540 \begin_layout Standard
28545 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
28546 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
28549 \begin_layout Description
28550 refeq Appends the phrase
28551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28566 to every nomenclature entry, where
28572 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
28575 \begin_layout Description
28576 refpage Appends the phrase
28577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28592 to every nomenclature entry, where
28598 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
28601 \begin_layout Description
28602 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
28605 \begin_layout Standard
28606 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
28607 class options list in the
28609 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28613 In this document the options
28620 \begin_layout Standard
28621 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28627 \begin_layout Standard
28628 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
28629 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
28634 field in the nomenclature dialog:
28637 \begin_layout Description
28647 \begin_layout Description
28650 nomrefpage Like the
28657 \begin_layout Description
28660 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
28669 \begin_layout Description
28673 \begin_inset space ~
28679 \begin_inset space ~
28684 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
28687 \begin_layout Standard
28689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28696 are automatically translated for some document languages.
28697 If not, add these lines to your LaTeX preamble:
28700 \begin_layout Standard
28708 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
28711 \begin_inset Newline newline
28718 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
28723 \begin_inset Newline newline
28727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28742 by their translation.
28745 \begin_layout Subsection
28746 Printing the Nomenclature
28747 \begin_inset Index idx
28750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28751 Nomenclature ! Printing
28759 \begin_layout Standard
28760 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
28762 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28763 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28779 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
28780 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
28781 You can choose between these settings:
28784 \begin_layout Description
28785 Default a space of 1
28786 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28792 \begin_layout Description
28794 \begin_inset space ~
28798 \begin_inset space ~
28801 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
28804 \begin_layout Description
28805 Custom custom space
28808 \begin_layout Standard
28809 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
28810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28818 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
28826 For example, in order to change the name to
28830 , add the following line to the preamble:
28833 \begin_layout Standard
28841 nomname}{List of Symbols}
28844 \begin_layout Subsection
28845 Nomenclature Program
28846 \begin_inset Index idx
28849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28850 Nomenclature ! Program
28856 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28858 name "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
28865 \begin_layout Standard
28866 LyX uses the program
28870 , that is part of every LaTeX distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
28871 LyX's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
28876 by adding options, see section
28877 \begin_inset space ~
28881 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28883 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
28888 The available options are listed and explained in
28889 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28891 key "nomencl,makeindex"
28898 \begin_layout Section
28900 \begin_inset Index idx
28903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28910 \begin_inset Index idx
28913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28914 Document ! Branches
28920 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28922 name "sec:Branches"
28929 \begin_layout Standard
28930 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
28931 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
28932 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
28933 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
28936 \begin_layout Standard
28937 For these cases LyX allows you to put text into branches.
28938 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
28939 To create a branch, either select the menu
28941 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28942 Branch\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28945 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
28947 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28954 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
28955 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
28956 its background color inside LyX and whether the name of the branch should
28957 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
28958 (see below for an example).
28959 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
28960 to the name of the other) and to add
28961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28969 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28973 \begin_inset space ~
28976 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
28977 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
28980 \begin_layout Standard
28981 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
28982 These boxes are inserted via the menu
28984 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28987 where you can choose a branch.
28988 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
28992 \begin_layout Standard
28993 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
28994 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
28997 \begin_layout Standard
28998 \begin_inset Branch Question
29001 \begin_layout Standard
29002 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29010 \begin_layout Standard
29011 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29014 \begin_layout Standard
29015 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29023 \begin_layout Standard
29030 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29031 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29034 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29035 Consider for example a file
29036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29043 which has the above branches.
29045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29052 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29076 branch were inactive,
29077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29092 branch was active, likewise
29093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29108 branch was active, and
29109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29112 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29116 if both branches were active.
29117 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29120 \begin_layout Standard
29121 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29127 \begin_layout Standard
29128 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29129 like inside equations, you can code special LaTeX definitions for each
29131 For example you can define for the question branch
29135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29136 For an introduction to the LaTeX-syntax, see section
29137 \begin_inset space ~
29141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29143 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29155 \begin_layout Standard
29165 \begin_layout Standard
29175 \begin_layout Standard
29176 and for the answer branch
29179 \begin_layout Standard
29189 \begin_layout Standard
29199 \begin_layout Standard
29200 \begin_inset Branch Question
29203 \begin_layout Standard
29207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29235 \begin_layout Standard
29236 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29239 \begin_layout Standard
29243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29271 \begin_layout Standard
29272 Now it is possible to use the
29276 question{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29283 answer{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29286 commands to obtain conditional output.
29287 Here is an example formula where only the
29294 \begin_inset Formula
29296 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29304 \begin_layout Standard
29305 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29313 \begin_layout Standard
29314 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29316 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29320 \begin_inset space \space{}
29323 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own LaTeX commands.).
29324 For this advanced usage, see the
29329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29332 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29339 \begin_layout Section
29341 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29343 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29348 \begin_inset Index idx
29351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29360 \begin_layout Standard
29363 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29364 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29367 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29369 All these options are provided by the LaTeX-package
29374 \begin_inset Index idx
29377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29378 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
29383 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29384 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29385 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
29386 part of the document.
29390 \begin_layout Standard
29391 The header information in the dialog tab
29395 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29396 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
29397 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
29398 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
29402 \begin_inset space ~
29406 \begin_inset space ~
29411 is set, LyX tries to extract the header information from your document
29412 title and author entries.
29416 \begin_inset space ~
29420 \begin_inset space ~
29424 \begin_inset space ~
29429 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
29432 \begin_layout Standard
29433 You can specify in the dialog tab
29437 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
29442 \begin_inset space ~
29446 \begin_inset space ~
29450 \begin_inset space ~
29455 option allows long links to be split;
29458 \begin_inset space ~
29462 \begin_inset space ~
29466 \begin_inset space ~
29474 \begin_inset space ~
29479 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
29482 \begin_inset space ~
29487 colors the different links.
29488 The default colors are:
29491 \begin_layout Labeling
29492 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29497 for hyperlinks and URLs
29500 \begin_layout Labeling
29501 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29509 \begin_layout Labeling
29510 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29518 \begin_layout Standard
29519 but you can change these in the field
29524 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
29527 \begin_layout Standard
29530 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
29533 \begin_layout Standard
29538 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
29539 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
29540 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
29543 \begin_layout Standard
29548 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
29549 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
29550 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
29560 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
29561 when opening the PDF.
29563 \begin_inset space ~
29566 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
29567 \begin_inset space ~
29570 1 will only display the sections.
29573 \begin_layout Standard
29574 PDF properties are also used in this document.
29575 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
29581 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
29582 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29591 \begin_layout Section
29592 TeX Code and the LaTeX Syntax
29593 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29595 name "sec:TeX-Code"
29602 \begin_layout Subsection
29604 \begin_inset Index idx
29607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29614 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29616 name "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
29623 \begin_layout Standard
29624 As LyX uses LaTeX in the background, it supports many LaTeX commands and
29625 constructs, but not all.
29626 LaTeX contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
29627 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
29628 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
29629 is a LaTeX-package for every problem, though LyX cannot support all packages
29630 and their commands.
29633 \begin_layout Standard
29634 But don't worry, you can use any LaTeX-command directly in LyX inside the
29636 A TeX Code box is created by the menu
29638 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29651 \begin_inset space ~
29656 or by the toolbar button
29669 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
29677 \begin_layout Standard
29678 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as TeX Code.
29679 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard LyX text.
29680 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
29681 using the LaTeX-command
29687 , you can write the command part
29693 in a TeX Code box before the word and the closing brace
29697 in a second TeX Code box behind the word.
29698 The word between the two TeX Code boxes is then the argument as it is in
29699 the following example:
29702 \begin_layout Standard
29703 \begin_inset Graphics
29704 filename clipart/ERT.png
29712 \begin_layout Standard
29716 \begin_layout Standard
29717 This is a line with a
29721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29744 \begin_layout Standard
29745 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29753 At the end of LaTeX-commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
29754 to let LaTeX know that the command is finished.
29762 \begin_layout Subsection
29763 A Short Introduction to the LaTeX Syntax
29764 \begin_inset Argument 1
29767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29774 \begin_inset Index idx
29777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29784 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29786 name "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29793 \begin_layout Standard
29794 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
29795 about the LaTeX-commands that LyX uses in the background.
29796 Because LaTeX is based on commands, you can
29797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29805 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
29806 any time if you know the right commands.
29807 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
29808 is the end of the day.
29809 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
29810 all caption labels bold.
29811 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
29813 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
29817 \begin_layout Standard
29818 Now LaTeX comes into play.
29819 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a LaTeX-package.
29820 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the LaTeX package
29822 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29831 \begin_layout Standard
29832 As result you find that the package
29837 \begin_inset Index idx
29840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29841 LaTeX-packages ! caption
29847 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
29849 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29852 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
29859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29867 \begin_inset space ~
29875 \begin_layout Standard
29880 usepackage[options]{package name}
29883 \begin_layout Standard
29884 All LaTeX commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
29885 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
29886 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
29889 \begin_layout Standard
29890 In your case the package name is
29895 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
29900 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
29901 So you add the command
29904 \begin_layout Standard
29909 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
29912 \begin_layout Standard
29913 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
29917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29918 For more commands provided by the
29922 package, have a look at its documentation,
29923 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29937 \begin_layout Standard
29938 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
29940 For example if you use a
29944 class, you don't need the package
29948 , you can instead write
29951 \begin_layout Standard
29956 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
29961 \begin_layout Standard
29962 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
29963 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
29964 documentation of the document class you want to use.
29971 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
29974 \begin_layout Standard
29975 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
29976 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
29978 To insert a LaTeX-command in text, use the TeX Code box as described in
29979 the previous section.
29982 \begin_layout Standard
29983 If you want to learn more about LaTeX and its syntax, have a look at the
29985 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29987 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
29994 \begin_layout Standard
29995 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30001 \begin_layout Standard
30005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30015 \begin_inset Note Note
30018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30019 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30027 \begin_layout Left Header
30028 \begin_inset Argument 1
30031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30051 \begin_inset Note Note
30054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30055 defines the header line as described below
30063 \begin_layout Center Header
30064 \begin_inset Argument 1
30067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30076 \begin_layout Right Header
30077 \begin_inset Argument 1
30080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30101 \begin_layout Left Footer
30102 \begin_inset Argument 1
30105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30126 \begin_layout Center Footer
30127 \begin_inset Argument 1
30130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30141 \begin_inset Newline newline
30145 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30151 \begin_layout Right Footer
30152 \begin_inset Argument 1
30155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30177 \begin_layout Section
30178 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30179 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30181 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30186 \begin_inset Index idx
30189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30190 Document ! Header/Footer line
30196 \begin_inset Index idx
30199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30208 \begin_layout Standard
30209 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30213 \begin_inset space ~
30224 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30230 \begin_inset space ~
30236 As a second step add in the menu
30238 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30239 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30246 Custom Header/Footerlines
30247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30251 This module offers the following 6
30252 \begin_inset space ~
30258 \begin_layout Description
30260 \begin_inset space ~
30264 \begin_inset space ~
30268 \begin_inset space ~
30272 \begin_inset space ~
30276 \begin_inset space ~
30282 \begin_layout Description
30284 \begin_inset space ~
30288 \begin_inset space ~
30292 \begin_inset space ~
30296 \begin_inset space ~
30300 \begin_inset space ~
30306 \begin_layout Standard
30307 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30310 \begin_layout Standard
30311 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30312 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30314 \begin_inset space ~
30318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30320 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30324 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30327 \begin_layout Standard
30328 \begin_inset Float figure
30334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30337 \begin_inset Tabular
30338 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30339 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
30340 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30341 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30342 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30344 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30362 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30373 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30391 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30402 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
30405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30406 The normal text on the page goes here.
30407 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
30409 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
30410 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
30415 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30424 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30435 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30453 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30464 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
30476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30482 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30500 \begin_inset Caption Standard
30502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30503 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30505 name "fig:Page-layout"
30509 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
30522 \begin_layout Standard
30523 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30531 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
30535 \begin_inset space ~
30540 is set to “Default”.
30541 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
30550 \begin_layout Subsection
30554 \begin_layout Standard
30555 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
30556 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
30557 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
30558 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
30560 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
30561 Defining the footer line works similarly.
30564 \begin_layout Standard
30565 For the definition, you will need some LaTeX-commands that are inserted
30568 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30581 \begin_inset space ~
30589 \begin_layout Description
30592 thepage prints the current page number
30595 \begin_layout Description
30598 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
30601 \begin_layout Description
30604 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
30607 \begin_layout Description
30610 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
30611 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
30614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30618 \begin_inset Quotes prd
30621 because it usually goes in a left header.
30624 \begin_layout Description
30627 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
30628 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
30630 It is normally used in the right header.
30633 \begin_layout Subsection
30634 Default header/footer
30637 \begin_layout Standard
30638 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
30639 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
30640 footer has the page number.
30641 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
30642 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
30643 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
30646 \begin_inset space ~
30654 \begin_layout Subsection
30658 \begin_layout Standard
30659 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
30660 Some pages are different.
30661 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
30662 a new part or chapter in your book.
30663 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
30664 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
30665 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
30668 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30669 Header and footer decoration line
30672 \begin_layout Standard
30673 By default, you get a 0.4
30674 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30677 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
30678 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
30690 in the following way:
30693 \begin_layout Standard
30700 headrulewidth}{thickness}
30703 \begin_layout Standard
30704 where thickness is a size in standard units like
30713 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
30714 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30720 \begin_layout Standard
30721 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of LaTeX.
30722 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
30723 \begin_inset space ~
30727 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30736 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30737 Several header/footer lines
30740 \begin_layout Standard
30741 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
30742 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
30743 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
30745 To expand the height, redefine the LaTeX length
30759 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30760 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30773 \begin_inset space ~
30781 \begin_layout Standard
30788 headheight}{height}
30791 \begin_layout Standard
30792 where height is a size in standard units.
30793 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
30794 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
30795 Then open the LaTeX logfile with the menu
30797 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30814 \begin_inset space ~
30819 to see if you can find a warning about the package
30824 \begin_inset Index idx
30827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30828 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
30834 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
30835 for your header/footer.
30838 \begin_layout Subsection
30842 \begin_layout Standard
30843 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
30844 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
30845 This example consists of the following definition:
30848 \begin_layout Description
30850 \begin_inset space ~
30859 , empty optional argument
30862 \begin_layout Description
30864 \begin_inset space ~
30867 Header empty, empty optional argument
30870 \begin_layout Description
30872 \begin_inset space ~
30881 in the optional argument
30884 \begin_layout Description
30886 \begin_inset space ~
30895 in the optional argument
30898 \begin_layout Description
30900 \begin_inset space ~
30912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30916 \begin_inset Newline newline
30920 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30927 in the optional argument
30930 \begin_layout Description
30932 \begin_inset space ~
30941 , empty optional argument
30944 \begin_layout Description
30947 headrulewidth set to 2
30948 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30954 \begin_layout Standard
30955 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
30956 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
30962 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30971 \begin_layout Standard
30972 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
30978 \begin_layout Standard
30982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30986 pagestyle{headings}
30992 \begin_inset Note Note
30995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30996 switches back to page style with the default headings
31004 \begin_layout Section
31005 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31006 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31008 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31013 \begin_inset Index idx
31016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31023 \begin_inset Index idx
31026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31035 \begin_layout Standard
31036 LyX allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the
31037 fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31038 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31041 \begin_layout Subsection
31045 \begin_layout Standard
31046 To get previews working, you need the LaTeX package
31051 \begin_inset Index idx
31054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31055 LaTeX-packages ! preview-latex
31060 (on some systems named simply
31065 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the TeX-catalogue,
31067 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31073 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
31074 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31082 package; for LyX on Windows this program and also the LaTeX-package are
31083 automatically installed together with LyX.
31086 \begin_layout Subsection
31090 \begin_layout Standard
31091 If you would for example like to see in LyX your math formulas typeset by
31092 LaTeX, activate the option
31095 \begin_inset space ~
31102 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31108 \begin_inset space ~
31112 \begin_inset space ~
31115 feel\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31122 \begin_inset space ~
31135 \begin_inset space ~
31140 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31143 \begin_layout Standard
31144 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by LaTeX,
31148 \begin_inset space ~
31156 \begin_inset space ~
31164 \begin_layout Standard
31165 Previews are generated when you load a document into LyX and when you finish
31169 \begin_layout Standard
31170 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31178 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31179 generated by activating the option
31182 \begin_inset space ~
31188 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31196 \begin_layout Subsection
31197 Selected document parts
31200 \begin_layout Standard
31201 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31202 for example things that LyX cannot render like rotated parts or things
31203 that are not yet supported by LyX.
31204 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31206 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31210 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31211 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31212 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31215 \begin_layout Standard
31216 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the LaTeX command
31222 which is not yet supported by LyX.
31226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31233 is explained in section
31235 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31240 \begin_inset space ~
31250 Instead of the TeX Code boxes you want to see in LyX the final rotated
31251 boxes, for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding
31253 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31255 Here is the result:
31258 \begin_layout Standard
31259 \begin_inset Preview
31261 \begin_layout Standard
31266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31270 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31276 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31286 height_special "totalheight"
31289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31314 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31320 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31342 \begin_layout Standard
31343 Previewing works also for colors.
31344 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the LaTeX
31355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31362 is explained in section
31369 \begin_inset space ~
31382 \begin_layout Standard
31383 \begin_inset Preview
31385 \begin_layout Standard
31389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31408 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
31413 This is text within a colored, framed box.
31417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31432 \begin_layout Standard
31433 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
31439 \begin_layout Standard
31440 If LyX does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
31441 above and also make sure that TeX Code in the preview inset is valid and
31442 that you loaded the LaTeX packages in your document preamble that are required
31444 If LyX cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able
31445 to view your document due to LaTeX errors.
31446 So if you have to use some TeX Code and don't know if it is correct, the
31447 preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the
31451 \begin_layout Subsection
31455 \begin_layout Standard
31456 You can preview the LaTeX source of the whole document or parts of it.
31459 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31461 \begin_inset space ~
31466 and a window will be shown where you can see the LaTeX-source code.
31467 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
31469 You can also select document parts in LyX's main window, then only this
31470 selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
31471 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
31472 the source view window.
31477 , you can see the changes as you make them in LyX; but note that if you
31478 have several documents open, this will slow things down as LyX updates
31479 them all, not just the one which is open at the time.
31482 \begin_layout Section
31483 Advanced Find and Replace
31484 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31486 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
31491 \begin_inset Index idx
31494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31501 \begin_inset Index idx
31504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31513 \begin_layout Subsection
31517 \begin_layout Standard
31518 The advanced find and replace feature of LyX allows for searching of complex,
31519 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within LyX documents.
31520 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
31521 The key-features are:
31524 \begin_layout Itemize
31525 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
31526 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
31527 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
31531 \begin_layout Itemize
31532 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
31533 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
31534 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
31535 a section heading will only be found within section headings
31538 \begin_layout Itemize
31539 Search may be widened to a specific
31544 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31548 \begin_inset space ~
31551 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
31552 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
31559 \begin_layout Itemize
31560 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
31561 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
31562 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31566 \begin_inset space ~
31569 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
31572 \begin_layout Subsection
31576 \begin_layout Standard
31577 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
31579 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31592 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
31595 ) or the toolbar button
31598 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
31604 Advanced Find and Replace
31609 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31613 \begin_layout Standard
31618 LyX mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
31622 \begin_inset space ~
31627 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
31630 arg "break-paragraph"
31634 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
31635 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
31639 arg "break-paragraph"
31642 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
31646 searches backwards.
31649 \begin_layout Standard
31653 \begin_inset space ~
31658 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
31667 \begin_inset space ~
31672 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
31675 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31676 Searching for mathematics
31679 \begin_layout Standard
31680 Mathematical formulas, such as
31681 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
31684 or something more complex like
31685 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
31688 , may be searched for by typing them in the
31693 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
31694 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
31695 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
31696 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
31702 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31706 \begin_layout Standard
31707 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
31708 This is done by switching to the
31712 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
31717 This way, entering in the
31724 \begin_layout Itemize
31725 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
31726 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
31729 \begin_layout Itemize
31730 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
31731 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
31734 \begin_layout Itemize
31735 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
31736 of it only within section headings.
31737 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
31738 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
31742 \begin_layout Itemize
31743 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
31744 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
31747 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31751 \begin_layout Standard
31752 The entries made in the
31756 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
31759 \begin_inset space ~
31765 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
31769 button or alternatively press
31772 arg "break-paragraph"
31779 while the cursor is in the
31782 \begin_inset space ~
31790 \begin_layout Standard
31791 You can replace with fully-featured formatted LyX entries.
31792 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
31796 \begin_layout Itemize
31797 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
31798 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
31799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31806 with its typewriter version
31807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31821 \begin_layout Itemize
31822 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
31824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31828 \begin_inset Formula $R$
31832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31840 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
31844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31847 (you may want to enable the
31850 \begin_inset space ~
31858 \begin_inset space ~
31863 options and disable the
31871 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
31872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31879 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
31880 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
31884 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\, j}$
31887 , or occurrences of
31888 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
31892 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
31898 \begin_layout Subsection
31902 \begin_layout Standard
31903 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
31907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31908 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
31910 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31912 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
31921 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
31927 This is done with the context menu
31929 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31930 Insert Regular Expression
31932 while the cursor is in the
31937 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
31938 expression matching rules
31942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31943 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed LyX
31945 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31949 \begin_inset space ~
31952 when matching LaTeX code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed
31953 to match expressions.
31958 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
31959 same text in the document.
31960 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
31961 Examples of using such a feature may be:
31964 \begin_layout Enumerate
31965 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
31970 editor the fraction
31971 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
31975 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
31978 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
31979 fractions with the given denominator.
31982 \begin_layout Enumerate
31983 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
31995 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32000 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32001 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32002 Also, by inserting a
32003 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32006 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32007 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32010 \begin_layout Standard
32011 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32012 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32013 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32016 , and referring back to them through
32017 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32021 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32025 For example, try searching with the regexp
32026 \begin_inset Newline newline
32029 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32032 \begin_inset Newline newline
32035 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32038 \begin_layout Standard
32039 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32042 \begin_layout Standard
32043 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32051 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32052 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32053 sub-expressions is absolute.
32055 \begin_inset space ~
32059 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32062 always refers to the first occurrence of
32063 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32066 in all entered regexps.
32074 \begin_layout Section
32076 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32078 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32083 \begin_inset Index idx
32086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32095 \begin_layout Standard
32096 LyX has a built-in spell checker.
32099 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32106 key or the toolbar button
32109 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32112 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32113 beginning of the currently selected text.
32114 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32115 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32116 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32117 scrolled so that it is visible.
32118 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32119 n, if any could be found.
32120 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32124 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32125 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32128 \begin_layout Standard
32129 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32132 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32136 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32137 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32138 LyX can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32139 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32142 \begin_inset space ~
32150 arg "dialog-show character"
32153 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32154 LyX automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32157 \begin_layout Standard
32158 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here:
32159 \begin_inset Newline newline
32163 \begin_inset Flex URL
32166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32168 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32174 \begin_inset Newline newline
32178 \begin_inset space ~
32181 files for each language.
32182 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32183 \begin_inset space ~
32186 files into LyX's installation subfolder
32195 \begin_inset Newline newline
32198 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32199 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32200 but in most cases these are
32216 is the language code.
32219 \begin_layout Subsection
32223 \begin_layout Standard
32226 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32227 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32229 \begin_inset space ~
32232 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32235 you can set the following things:
32238 \begin_layout Description
32240 \begin_inset space ~
32243 engine Select the library LyX should use for spell checking.
32244 Depending on your platform,
32258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32259 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32260 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32275 \begin_layout Description
32277 \begin_inset space ~
32280 language If this field is not empty, LyX will always use the given language
32281 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32284 \begin_layout Description
32286 \begin_inset space ~
32289 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32295 \begin_inset space \space{}
32299 This should normally not be needed.
32302 \begin_layout Description
32304 \begin_inset space ~
32308 \begin_inset space ~
32311 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32323 \begin_layout Description
32325 \begin_inset space ~
32328 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
32329 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
32330 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
32331 appear in a context menu.
32332 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
32336 \begin_layout Description
32338 \begin_inset space ~
32342 \begin_inset space ~
32346 \begin_inset space ~
32349 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
32353 \begin_layout Section
32355 \begin_inset Index idx
32358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32365 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32367 name "sec:Thesaurus"
32374 \begin_layout Standard
32375 LyX provides a multilingual thesaurus.
32376 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
32385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32386 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32388 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
32397 thesaurus library, which is included in LyX).
32398 Therefore, LyX is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
32399 which are available for many languages.
32402 \begin_layout Standard
32403 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
32407 \begin_layout Subsection
32408 Setting up the thesaurus
32411 \begin_layout Standard
32420 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
32424 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
32429 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
32431 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32435 \begin_inset space ~
32443 For instance, the US English files are named:
32446 \begin_layout Itemize
32450 \begin_layout Itemize
32454 \begin_layout Standard
32463 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
32464 and you just need to point LyX (in
32466 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32467 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32468 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32470 \begin_inset space ~
32475 ) to the path where they are installed.
32479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32480 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
32481 ies, typical locations are
32487 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
32491 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
32495 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
32498 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
32504 LibreOffice-<Version>
32511 On the Mac, the default location is
32513 /Users\SpecialChar \slash{}
32514 <user name>\SpecialChar \slash{}
32515 Library\SpecialChar \slash{}
32516 Application Support\SpecialChar \slash{}
32517 libreoffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
32518 <version>\SpecialChar \slash{}
32526 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
32527 during the LyX installation process, which will then be installed in the
32528 correct place right away.
32531 \begin_layout Standard
32532 If you want to install new\SpecialChar \slash{}
32533 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
32537 \begin_layout Itemize
32538 \begin_inset Flex URL
32541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32543 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
32551 \begin_layout Standard
32552 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
32553 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
32555 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32556 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32557 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32559 \begin_inset space ~
32565 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
32566 and point LyX there.
32569 \begin_layout Standard
32570 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
32572 LibreOffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
32575 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
32581 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
32584 If you do this, make sure that LyX is able to find the installed dictionaries,
32586 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32592 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32593 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32594 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32596 \begin_inset space ~
32601 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
32604 \begin_layout Subsection
32605 Using the thesaurus
32608 \begin_layout Standard
32609 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
32611 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32614 or the toolbar button
32617 arg "thesaurus-entry"
32620 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
32622 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
32624 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
32625 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
32626 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
32635 ), related terms (such as
32638 \begin_inset space ~
32647 ), compounds (such as
32650 \begin_inset space ~
32659 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
32668 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
32671 \begin_layout Standard
32672 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
32673 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
32677 \begin_layout Standard
32678 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
32679 the dictionary, such as the above
32683 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
32684 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32688 \begin_inset space \space{}
32691 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
32692 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
32693 For example, looking up the word form
32697 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
32702 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
32703 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32707 \begin_inset space \space{}
32718 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
32719 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
32720 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
32723 \begin_layout Section
32725 \begin_inset Index idx
32728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32735 \begin_inset Index idx
32738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32739 Document ! Change Tracking
32745 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32747 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
32754 \begin_layout Standard
32755 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
32756 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
32757 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
32758 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
32760 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32762 \begin_inset space ~
32765 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32767 \begin_inset space ~
32775 \begin_layout Standard
32776 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
32790 The color depends on the author that made the change.
32791 You can change the color in
32793 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32794 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32796 \begin_inset space ~
32800 \begin_inset space ~
32805 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
32811 \begin_inset Index idx
32814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32815 Color ! Change tracking
32820 The author and the date of the change are shown in LyX's status bar when
32821 the cursor is in changed text.
32822 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
32825 arg "changes-merge"
32831 \begin_layout Standard
32832 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in LyX:
32833 \begin_inset Index idx
32836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32845 \begin_layout Standard
32846 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32852 \begin_layout Standard
32853 \begin_inset Graphics
32854 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
32862 \begin_layout Standard
32863 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32869 \begin_layout Standard
32870 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
32873 \begin_layout Standard
32874 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32880 \begin_layout Standard
32881 \begin_inset Tabular
32882 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
32883 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
32884 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
32885 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
32886 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32895 arg "changes-track"
32903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32909 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32911 \begin_inset space ~
32914 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32916 \begin_inset space ~
32925 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32934 arg "changes-output"
32942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32948 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32950 \begin_inset space ~
32953 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32955 \begin_inset space ~
32959 \begin_inset space ~
32963 \begin_inset space ~
32972 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32993 Jumps to the next change
32999 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33008 arg "change-accept"
33016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33022 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33024 \begin_inset space ~
33027 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33029 \begin_inset space ~
33038 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33047 arg "change-reject"
33055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33061 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33063 \begin_inset space ~
33066 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33068 \begin_inset space ~
33077 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33086 arg "changes-merge"
33094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33100 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33102 \begin_inset space ~
33105 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33107 \begin_inset space ~
33116 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33125 arg "all-changes-accept"
33133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33139 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33141 \begin_inset space ~
33144 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33146 \begin_inset space ~
33150 \begin_inset space ~
33159 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33168 arg "all-changes-reject"
33176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33182 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33184 \begin_inset space ~
33187 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33189 \begin_inset space ~
33193 \begin_inset space ~
33202 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33225 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33226 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33239 \begin_inset space ~
33248 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33271 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33273 \begin_inset space ~
33289 \begin_layout Standard
33290 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33296 \begin_layout Standard
33297 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33317 \begin_layout Standard
33318 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33319 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33320 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33321 the next change after the current cursor position.
33322 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
33323 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
33324 step to the next change.
33325 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
33328 \begin_layout Standard
33329 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
33330 to describe a change.
33333 \begin_layout Standard
33334 To show the changes made in the output you need the LaTeX package
33339 \begin_inset Index idx
33342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33343 LaTeX-packages ! dvipost
33349 You will find it in the TeX Catalogue,
33350 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33356 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
33359 \begin_layout Section
33360 Comparison of Documents
33361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33363 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
33368 \begin_inset Index idx
33371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33372 Comparison of documents
33380 \begin_layout Standard
33381 You can compare two different LyX files via the menu
33383 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33387 The comparison result is a LyX file with change tracking enabled showing
33389 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document LyX should
33390 take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
33394 \begin_inset space ~
33398 \begin_inset space ~
33402 \begin_inset space ~
33411 \begin_inset space ~
33415 \begin_inset space ~
33419 \begin_inset space ~
33423 \begin_inset space ~
33427 \begin_inset space ~
33431 \begin_inset space ~
33436 enables the change tracking option
33439 \begin_inset space ~
33443 \begin_inset space ~
33447 \begin_inset space ~
33452 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
33455 \begin_layout Section
33456 International Support
33457 \begin_inset Index idx
33460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33461 International support
33469 \begin_layout Standard
33470 This section describes how to use LyX with any language you want.
33471 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
33472 up LyX to use them:
33473 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33475 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
33482 \begin_layout Standard
33483 Besides languages, LyX also supports phonetic symbols, see section
33484 \begin_inset space ~
33488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33490 reference "sub:Special-Character"
33497 \begin_layout Subsection
33499 \begin_inset Index idx
33502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33509 \begin_inset Index idx
33512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33513 Document ! Settings
33519 \begin_inset Index idx
33522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33523 Document ! Language
33531 \begin_layout Standard
33534 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33535 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33538 dialog lets you set
33540 the language, the quote style and character encoding
33545 \begin_layout Standard
33550 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for LaTeX export.
33554 \begin_inset space ~
33559 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
33560 For details about the different encoding options see section
33561 \begin_inset space ~
33565 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33567 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
33574 \begin_layout Subsection
33575 Keyboard mapping configuration
33576 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33578 name "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
33585 \begin_layout Standard
33586 If you have for example a U.
33587 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33590 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
33591 can use an alternate keymap.
33592 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure LyX to
33593 use an Italian keymap.
33596 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33597 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33598 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33601 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
33602 \begin_inset space ~
33606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33608 reference "sub:Keyboard-Map"
33613 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
33614 which one you want to use.
33617 \begin_layout Standard
33618 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
33619 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
33620 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
33621 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33624 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
33625 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
33626 one to support the characters you want.
33627 This and many other customizations are explained in the
33634 \begin_layout Chapter
33637 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33639 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
33646 \begin_layout Standard
33647 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
33648 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
33649 topic inside the user's guide.
33652 \begin_layout Section
33654 \begin_inset Index idx
33657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33666 \begin_layout Standard
33671 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
33674 \begin_layout Subsection
33678 \begin_layout Standard
33679 Creates a new document.
33682 \begin_layout Subsection
33686 \begin_layout Standard
33687 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
33688 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
33689 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
33692 \begin_layout Subsection
33696 \begin_layout Standard
33700 \begin_layout Subsection
33704 \begin_layout Standard
33705 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
33706 Click there on a file to open it.
33709 \begin_layout Subsection
33713 \begin_layout Standard
33714 Closes the current document.
33717 \begin_layout Subsection
33721 \begin_layout Standard
33722 Closes all opened documents.
33725 \begin_layout Subsection
33729 \begin_layout Standard
33730 Saves the actual document.
33733 \begin_layout Subsection
33737 \begin_layout Standard
33738 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
33741 \begin_layout Subsection
33745 \begin_layout Standard
33746 Saves all opened documents.
33749 \begin_layout Subsection
33753 \begin_layout Standard
33754 Reloads the actual document from disk.
33757 \begin_layout Subsection
33761 \begin_layout Standard
33762 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
33763 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
33764 It is described in the section
33766 Version Control in LyX
33770 Additional Features
33775 \begin_layout Subsection
33779 \begin_layout Standard
33780 Here you can import files from older LyX-versions, HTML-files, LaTeX-files,
33781 NoWeb-files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files
33783 The files will be imported as a new LyX-document.
33786 \begin_layout Standard
33787 When using the menu entry
33790 \begin_inset space ~
33795 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
33799 \begin_inset space ~
33803 \begin_inset space ~
33807 \begin_inset space ~
33812 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
33813 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
33816 \begin_layout Subsection
33818 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33827 \begin_layout Standard
33828 You can export your document to various file formats.
33829 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your LyX-file.
33830 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
33831 They depend on the programs found by LyX during its configuration.
33834 \begin_layout Standard
33835 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
33837 \begin_inset space ~
33841 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33843 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
33850 \begin_layout Description
33856 \begin_inset space ~
33863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33870 yX format of the special LyX
33871 \begin_inset space ~
33874 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
33875 \begin_inset Newline newline
33878 Since LyX 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into LyX.
33881 \begin_layout Description
33882 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
33888 \begin_layout Description
33890 \begin_inset space ~
33893 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
33899 \begin_layout Description
33900 DraftDVI LaTeX's native DVI-format.
33901 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
33902 files paths or file names in your document.
33903 LyX use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
33910 \begin_layout Description
33911 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
33912 in files paths or file names
33915 \begin_layout Description
33917 \begin_inset space ~
33924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33931 eX) DVI-format using the program
33935 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-TeX fonts;
33938 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33946 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
33954 \begin_layout Description
33956 \begin_inset space ~
33959 Dot text file with code in the programming language
33963 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
33968 \begin_layout Description
33969 HTML HTML-format (the HTML-converter is a third-party product and may not
33973 \begin_layout Description
33975 \begin_inset space ~
33979 \begin_inset space ~
33982 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
33986 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
33994 \begin_layout Description
34001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34009 \begin_inset space ~
34020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34033 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34038 \begin_layout Description
34045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34053 \begin_inset space ~
34058 text file with the LaTeX source, additionally all images used in the document
34059 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34063 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34066 \begin_layout Description
34073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34081 \begin_inset space ~
34086 text file with the LaTeX source code, additionally all images used in the
34087 document will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable
34095 \begin_layout Description
34102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34110 \begin_inset space ~
34121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34134 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34139 \begin_layout Description
34141 \begin_inset space ~
34145 \begin_inset space ~
34154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34163 TeX) text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the syntax of the
34164 music notation software
34169 \begin_layout Description
34176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34186 \begin_inset space ~
34190 \begin_inset space ~
34193 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34194 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34195 to compile it (images, child documents, BibTeX files, etc.)
34198 \begin_layout Description
34205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34215 \begin_inset space ~
34218 z.y.x LyX-Document in a format readable by the LyX versions z.y.x (
34219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34234 represent the version number)
34237 \begin_layout Description
34244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34253 yXHTML HTML-format using LyX's internal XHTML engine
34256 \begin_layout Description
34257 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34262 \begin_layout Description
34263 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
34265 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34268 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
34272 \begin_layout Description
34276 \begin_inset space ~
34281 PDF-format using the program
34285 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34288 \begin_layout Description
34292 \begin_inset space ~
34299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34308 PDF-format using the program
34312 , produces PDF-files directly
34315 \begin_layout Description
34319 \begin_inset space ~
34324 PDF-format using the program
34328 , produces PDF-files directly
34331 \begin_layout Description
34335 \begin_inset space ~
34340 PDF-format using the program
34344 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34347 \begin_layout Description
34351 \begin_inset space ~
34358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34367 PDF-format using the program
34371 , produces PDF-files directly
34374 \begin_layout Description
34378 \begin_inset space ~
34386 \begin_layout Description
34390 \begin_inset space ~
34394 \begin_inset space ~
34399 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
34400 and then exported as text using the program
34405 \begin_layout Description
34410 PostScript format using the program
34415 \begin_layout Description
34416 Sweave text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the statistical
34417 programming language
34430 it is possible to use
34437 \begin_layout Standard
34438 If one of the menu entries
34445 \begin_inset space ~
34454 is missing, you need to update your LaTeX installation.
34455 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
34456 \begin_inset space ~
34460 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34462 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
34467 \begin_inset Index idx
34470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34471 Reconfiguration of LyX
34479 \begin_layout Subsection
34483 \begin_layout Standard
34484 With this menu entry you can print your document to a file in PostScript
34485 format or send it to a printer.
34486 The printer will also use the document in PostScript format.
34487 The conversion to PostScript is done in the background by LyX using the
34493 For more information have a look at section
34494 \begin_inset space ~
34498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34500 reference "sub:Printing-the-File"
34507 \begin_layout Subsection
34511 \begin_layout Standard
34512 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
34513 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to LyX's PATH
34514 prefix, see section
34515 \begin_inset space ~
34519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34521 reference "sec:Paths"
34526 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
34535 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
34536 The format can be changed in LyX's preferences as described in section
34537 \begin_inset space ~
34541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34543 reference "sub:Converters"
34550 \begin_layout Subsection
34551 New and Close Window
34554 \begin_layout Standard
34555 Opens or closes a new instance of LyX.
34558 \begin_layout Subsection
34562 \begin_layout Standard
34563 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
34566 \begin_layout Section
34568 \begin_inset Index idx
34571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34580 \begin_layout Subsection
34584 \begin_layout Standard
34585 Described in section
34586 \begin_inset space ~
34590 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34592 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
34599 \begin_layout Subsection
34600 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
34603 \begin_layout Standard
34604 Described in section
34605 \begin_inset space ~
34609 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34611 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
34618 \begin_layout Subsection
34622 \begin_layout Standard
34623 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
34624 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
34627 \begin_layout Subsection
34631 \begin_layout Standard
34632 Selects the whole document.
34635 \begin_layout Subsection
34636 Find & Replace (Quick)
34639 \begin_layout Standard
34640 Described in section
34641 \begin_inset space ~
34645 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34647 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
34654 \begin_layout Subsection
34655 Find & Replace (Advanced)
34658 \begin_layout Standard
34659 Described in section
34660 \begin_inset space ~
34664 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34666 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34673 \begin_layout Subsection
34674 Move Paragraph Up/Down
34677 \begin_layout Standard
34678 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
34682 \begin_layout Subsection
34686 \begin_layout Standard
34687 Described in section
34688 \begin_inset space ~
34692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34694 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
34701 \begin_layout Subsection
34703 \begin_inset Index idx
34706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34707 Paragraph ! Settings
34715 \begin_layout Standard
34716 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
34717 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
34721 \begin_layout Standard
34722 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
34723 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
34729 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34730 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34732 \begin_inset space ~
34740 \begin_layout Subsection
34744 \begin_layout Standard
34745 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
34746 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
34747 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
34751 \begin_layout Standard
34752 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
34754 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
34755 The properties of tables are described in section
34756 \begin_inset space ~
34760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34762 reference "sec:Tables"
34766 , the properties of formulas in chapter
34767 \begin_inset space ~
34771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34773 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
34780 \begin_layout Subsection
34781 Increase/Decrease List Depth
34784 \begin_layout Standard
34785 These menu entries are only active if the cursor is in an environment that
34787 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
34788 \begin_inset space ~
34792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34794 reference "sec:Nesting"
34799 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34801 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
34808 \begin_layout Section
34810 \begin_inset Index idx
34813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34822 \begin_layout Standard
34823 At the bottom of the
34827 menu the opened documents are listed.
34830 \begin_layout Subsection
34831 Open/Close all Insets
34834 \begin_layout Standard
34835 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
34838 \begin_layout Subsection
34839 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
34842 \begin_layout Standard
34843 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
34846 \begin_layout Standard
34847 Math macros are described in the
34854 \begin_layout Subsection
34858 \begin_layout Standard
34859 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
34861 \begin_inset space ~
34865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34867 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
34874 \begin_layout Subsection
34878 \begin_layout Standard
34879 Opens a window showing console messages.
34880 This is useful for debugging LyX (i.
34881 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34884 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
34885 while LaTeX is processing the document.
34888 \begin_layout Subsection
34890 \begin_inset space ~
34896 \begin_layout Standard
34897 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
34898 default output format for the document (menu
34900 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34901 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34902 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34904 \begin_inset space ~
34908 \begin_inset space ~
34914 \begin_inset space ~
34918 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34920 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
34924 ) or in the LyX preferences (menu
34926 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34927 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34929 \begin_inset space ~
34932 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34934 \begin_inset space ~
34937 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34939 \begin_inset space ~
34943 \begin_inset space ~
34949 \begin_inset space ~
34953 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34955 reference "sec:File-Formats"
34959 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
34960 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
34962 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34963 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34965 \begin_inset space ~
34968 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34970 \begin_inset space ~
34973 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34977 \begin_inset space ~
34981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34983 reference "sec:File-Formats"
34988 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
34989 The default output format is
34992 \begin_inset space ~
35000 \begin_layout Subsection
35001 View (Other Formats)
35004 \begin_layout Standard
35005 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
35006 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
35007 actual document with an external program.
35008 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
35009 the LaTeX programs that are found when LyX was configured.
35010 All possible formats are listed in section
35011 \begin_inset space ~
35015 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35017 reference "sub:Export"
35022 You should at least see the menu entry
35027 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your LaTeX installation.
35028 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX (see section
35029 \begin_inset space ~
35033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35035 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35040 \begin_inset Index idx
35043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35044 Reconfiguration of LyX
35052 \begin_layout Standard
35053 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
35054 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
35056 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35057 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35059 \begin_inset space ~
35062 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35064 \begin_inset space ~
35067 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35071 \begin_inset space ~
35075 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35077 reference "sec:File-Formats"
35082 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
35085 \begin_layout Subsection
35087 \begin_inset space ~
35093 \begin_layout Standard
35094 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
35095 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
35098 \begin_layout Subsection
35099 Update (Other Formats)
35102 \begin_layout Standard
35103 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
35104 your document without opening a new viewer window.
35107 \begin_layout Subsection
35108 View Master Document
35111 \begin_layout Standard
35112 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
35114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35128 \begin_inset space ~
35133 manual for more information on this topic).
35134 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
35135 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
35139 \begin_inset space ~
35143 \begin_inset space ~
35148 generates the output of the whole book, while
35152 will just output the chapter alone.
35155 \begin_layout Standard
35156 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
35157 in the document settings (menu
35159 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35160 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35161 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35163 \begin_inset space ~
35167 \begin_inset space ~
35173 \begin_inset space ~
35177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35179 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
35183 ) or in the preferences (menu
35185 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35186 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35188 \begin_inset space ~
35191 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35193 \begin_inset space ~
35196 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35198 \begin_inset space ~
35202 \begin_inset space ~
35208 \begin_inset space ~
35212 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35214 reference "sec:File-Formats"
35221 \begin_layout Subsection
35222 Update Master Document
35225 \begin_layout Standard
35226 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
35228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35242 \begin_inset space ~
35247 manual for more information on this topic).
35248 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
35249 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
35252 \begin_layout Standard
35253 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
35254 in the document settings (menu
35256 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35257 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35258 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35260 \begin_inset space ~
35264 \begin_inset space ~
35270 \begin_inset space ~
35274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35276 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
35280 ) or in the preferences (menu
35282 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35283 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35285 \begin_inset space ~
35288 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35290 \begin_inset space ~
35293 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35295 \begin_inset space ~
35299 \begin_inset space ~
35305 \begin_inset space ~
35309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35311 reference "sec:File-Formats"
35318 \begin_layout Subsection
35322 \begin_layout Standard
35326 \begin_inset space ~
35330 \begin_inset space ~
35334 \begin_inset space ~
35338 \begin_inset space ~
35342 \begin_inset space ~
35346 \begin_inset space ~
35351 will split LyX's main window vertically while
35354 \begin_inset space ~
35358 \begin_inset space ~
35362 \begin_inset space ~
35366 \begin_inset space ~
35370 \begin_inset space ~
35374 \begin_inset space ~
35379 will split it horizontally.
35380 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35381 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35382 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35383 three or more documents at the same time.
35384 To close a split view, use the menu
35387 \begin_inset space ~
35391 \begin_inset space ~
35399 \begin_layout Subsection
35403 \begin_layout Standard
35404 Closes a split view.
35407 \begin_layout Subsection
35411 \begin_layout Standard
35412 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35413 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35414 It furthermore displays LyX's main window fullscreen.
35415 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35416 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35419 \begin_layout Subsection
35421 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35423 name "sub:Toolbars"
35428 \begin_inset Index idx
35431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35440 \begin_layout Standard
35441 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35442 All toolbars and the
35445 \begin_inset space ~
35450 can be turned on and off.
35455 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35467 \begin_inset space ~
35479 \begin_inset space ~
35484 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35488 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35495 \begin_layout Standard
35500 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35504 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35505 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35506 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35507 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35508 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35511 \begin_layout Standard
35512 LyX's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35513 \begin_inset space ~
35517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35519 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35526 \begin_layout Section
35528 \begin_inset Index idx
35531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35540 \begin_layout Subsection
35544 \begin_layout Standard
35545 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35546 \begin_inset space ~
35550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35552 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35563 \begin_layout Subsection
35565 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35567 name "sub:Special-Character"
35574 \begin_layout Standard
35575 Here you can insert the following characters:
35578 \begin_layout Description
35583 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35585 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35586 the available characters depend on the LaTeX-packages you have installed.
35587 You can get a complete display by checking
35590 \begin_inset space ~
35596 \begin_inset Newline newline
35600 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35608 Not all characters will be visible in the
35612 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35614 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35620 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
35624 ) can display every character.
35632 \begin_layout Description
35633 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar \ldots{}
35637 \begin_layout Description
35639 \begin_inset space ~
35643 \begin_inset space ~
35646 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35647 \begin_inset space ~
35651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35653 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
35660 \begin_layout Description
35662 \begin_inset space ~
35665 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35668 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35669 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35675 \begin_layout Description
35677 \begin_inset space ~
35680 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35683 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35684 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35690 \begin_layout Description
35692 \begin_inset space ~
35695 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar \nobreakdash-
35699 \begin_layout Description
35701 \begin_inset space ~
35704 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar \slash{}
35708 \begin_layout Description
35710 \begin_inset space ~
35713 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar \menuseparator
35717 \begin_layout Description
35719 \begin_inset space ~
35723 \begin_inset Index idx
35726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35733 \begin_inset Index idx
35736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35737 Language ! Phonetic symbols
35742 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
35743 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
35745 To use this feature you must have the LaTeX-package
35750 \begin_inset Index idx
35753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35754 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
35760 \begin_inset Newline newline
35763 More information about this feature can be found in the
35769 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35775 \begin_layout Subsection
35779 \begin_layout Standard
35780 Opens a submenu with the following options:
35783 \begin_layout Description
35784 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
35785 \begin_inset script superscript
35787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35796 \begin_layout Description
35797 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
35798 \begin_inset script subscript
35800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35809 \begin_layout Description
35811 \begin_inset space ~
35814 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
35815 \begin_inset space ~
35819 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35821 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
35828 \begin_layout Description
35830 \begin_inset space ~
35833 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
35834 \begin_inset space ~
35838 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35840 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
35847 \begin_layout Description
35849 \begin_inset space ~
35852 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
35853 \begin_inset space ~
35857 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35859 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
35866 \begin_layout Description
35868 \begin_inset space ~
35871 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
35872 \begin_inset space ~
35876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35878 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
35885 \begin_layout Description
35887 \begin_inset space ~
35890 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
35891 \begin_inset space ~
35895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35897 reference "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
35904 \begin_layout Description
35906 \begin_inset space ~
35909 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
35910 \begin_inset space ~
35914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35916 reference "sub:Vertical-Space"
35923 \begin_layout Description
35924 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
35925 \begin_inset space ~
35929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35931 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
35938 \begin_layout Description
35940 \begin_inset space ~
35943 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
35944 \begin_inset space ~
35948 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35950 reference "sub:Hyphenation"
35957 \begin_layout Description
35959 \begin_inset space ~
35962 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
35963 \begin_inset space ~
35967 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35969 reference "sub:Ligatures"
35976 \begin_layout Description
35978 \begin_inset space ~
35982 \begin_inset space ~
35985 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
35986 \begin_inset space ~
35990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35992 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
35999 \begin_layout Description
36001 \begin_inset space ~
36004 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36005 as described in section
36006 \begin_inset space ~
36010 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36012 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36019 \begin_layout Description
36021 \begin_inset space ~
36024 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36025 \begin_inset space ~
36029 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36031 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36038 \begin_layout Description
36040 \begin_inset space ~
36043 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36044 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36046 \begin_inset space ~
36050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36052 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36059 \begin_layout Description
36061 \begin_inset space ~
36064 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36065 \begin_inset space ~
36069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36071 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36078 \begin_layout Description
36080 \begin_inset space ~
36084 \begin_inset space ~
36087 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36088 \begin_inset space ~
36092 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36094 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36101 \begin_layout Subsection
36105 \begin_layout Standard
36106 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36110 \begin_inset space ~
36127 are described in section
36128 \begin_inset space ~
36132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36134 reference "sec:toc"
36143 is described in section
36144 \begin_inset space ~
36148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36150 reference "sec:Index"
36158 is described in section
36159 \begin_inset space ~
36163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36165 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36171 BibTeX Bibliography
36173 is described in section
36174 \begin_inset space ~
36178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36180 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
36187 \begin_layout Subsection
36191 \begin_layout Standard
36192 To insert floats, as described in section
36193 \begin_inset space ~
36197 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36199 reference "sec:Floats"
36203 and in detail the chapter
36210 \begin_inset space ~
36218 \begin_layout Subsection
36222 \begin_layout Standard
36223 To insert notes, described in section
36224 \begin_inset space ~
36228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36230 reference "sec:Notes"
36237 \begin_layout Subsection
36241 \begin_layout Standard
36242 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36244 Branches are described in section
36245 \begin_inset space ~
36249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36251 reference "sec:Branches"
36258 \begin_layout Subsection
36262 \begin_layout Standard
36263 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36264 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36266 An example is the document class
36267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36274 with three custom insets.
36277 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36281 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36287 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36290 \begin_layout Subsection
36292 \begin_inset Index idx
36295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36304 \begin_layout Standard
36305 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36307 For more information see chapter
36309 External Document Parts
36312 \begin_inset space ~
36318 \begin_layout Subsection
36320 \begin_inset Index idx
36323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36332 \begin_layout Standard
36333 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36334 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36341 \begin_inset space ~
36349 \begin_layout Subsection
36353 \begin_layout Standard
36358 dialog as described in section
36359 \begin_inset space ~
36363 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36365 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36372 \begin_layout Subsection
36376 \begin_layout Standard
36381 as described in section
36382 \begin_inset space ~
36386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36388 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36395 \begin_layout Subsection
36399 \begin_layout Standard
36404 as described in section
36405 \begin_inset space ~
36409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36411 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36418 \begin_layout Subsection
36420 \begin_inset Index idx
36423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36430 \begin_inset Index idx
36433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36434 Longtables ! Caption
36442 \begin_layout Standard
36443 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36444 Floats are described in section
36445 \begin_inset space ~
36449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36451 reference "sec:Floats"
36455 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36462 \begin_inset space ~
36470 \begin_layout Subsection
36474 \begin_layout Standard
36475 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36476 \begin_inset space ~
36480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36482 reference "sec:Index"
36489 \begin_layout Subsection
36493 \begin_layout Standard
36494 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36495 \begin_inset space ~
36499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36501 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36508 \begin_layout Subsection
36512 \begin_layout Standard
36513 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36514 Tables are described in section
36515 \begin_inset space ~
36519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36521 reference "sec:Tables"
36525 and in detail in the chapter
36532 \begin_inset space ~
36540 \begin_layout Subsection
36544 \begin_layout Standard
36550 Graphics are described in section
36551 \begin_inset space ~
36555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36557 reference "sec:Graphics"
36564 \begin_layout Subsection
36568 \begin_layout Standard
36569 Inserts a URL as described in section
36570 \begin_inset space ~
36574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36576 reference "sub:URLs"
36583 \begin_layout Subsection
36587 \begin_layout Standard
36588 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36589 \begin_inset space ~
36593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36595 reference "sub:Hyperlinks"
36602 \begin_layout Subsection
36606 \begin_layout Standard
36607 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36608 \begin_inset space ~
36612 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36614 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36621 \begin_layout Subsection
36625 \begin_layout Standard
36626 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36627 \begin_inset space ~
36631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36633 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36640 \begin_layout Subsection
36644 \begin_layout Standard
36645 Inserts a short title as described in section
36646 \begin_inset space ~
36650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36652 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
36659 \begin_layout Subsection
36663 \begin_layout Standard
36664 Inserts a TeX Code box as described in section
36665 \begin_inset space ~
36669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36671 reference "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36678 \begin_layout Subsection
36680 \begin_inset Index idx
36683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36692 \begin_layout Standard
36693 Inserts a program listings box.
36694 Program listings are explained in the chapter
36696 Program Code Listings
36701 \begin_inset space ~
36709 \begin_layout Subsection
36713 \begin_layout Standard
36714 Inserts the actual date.
36715 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
36717 LyX offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
36725 \begin_inset space ~
36733 \begin_layout Subsection
36737 \begin_layout Standard
36738 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
36739 \begin_inset space ~
36743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36745 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36752 \begin_layout Section
36754 \begin_inset Index idx
36757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36766 \begin_layout Standard
36767 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
36768 \begin_inset space ~
36771 of the current document.
36772 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
36775 \begin_layout Subsection
36779 \begin_layout Standard
36780 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
36781 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
36782 to jump, for example, between section
36783 \begin_inset space ~
36787 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
36788 \begin_inset space ~
36791 2.5 and use the submenu
36794 \begin_inset space ~
36798 \begin_inset space ~
36805 \begin_inset space ~
36811 \begin_inset space ~
36815 \begin_inset space ~
36821 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
36825 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
36831 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
36834 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
36837 \begin_layout Standard
36838 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
36842 \begin_inset space ~
36847 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
36850 \begin_inset space ~
36855 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
36858 \begin_layout Subsection
36859 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
36862 \begin_layout Standard
36863 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
36867 \begin_layout Subsection
36871 \begin_layout Standard
36872 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
36873 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
36874 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
36878 \begin_inset space ~
36882 \begin_inset space ~
36890 \begin_layout Subsection
36894 \begin_layout Standard
36895 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
36899 \begin_inset space ~
36907 \begin_inset space ~
36912 manual for a detailed description.
36915 \begin_layout Section
36917 \begin_inset Index idx
36920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36929 \begin_layout Subsection
36933 \begin_layout Standard
36934 Change Tracking is described in section
36935 \begin_inset space ~
36939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36941 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
36948 \begin_layout Subsection
36953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36963 \begin_layout Standard
36964 After running LaTeX by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be
36966 It shows the logfile of the LaTeX-program used.
36967 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
36968 to the clipboard or update the view.
36969 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for LaTeX-errors.
36972 \begin_layout Subsection
36976 \begin_layout Standard
36977 Opens the Outline window as described in sections
36978 \begin_inset space ~
36982 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36984 reference "sec:Navigating"
36989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36991 reference "sub:Table-of-Contents"
36998 \begin_layout Subsection
36999 Start Appendix Here
37002 \begin_layout Standard
37003 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37004 as described in section
37005 \begin_inset space ~
37009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37011 reference "sec:Appendices"
37018 \begin_layout Subsection
37022 \begin_layout Standard
37023 Un/compresses the current document.
37026 \begin_layout Subsection
37030 \begin_layout Standard
37031 The document settings are described in appendix
37032 \begin_inset space ~
37036 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37038 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37045 \begin_layout Section
37047 \begin_inset Index idx
37050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37059 \begin_layout Subsection
37063 \begin_layout Standard
37064 Spell checking is explained in section
37065 \begin_inset space ~
37069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37071 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37078 \begin_layout Subsection
37082 \begin_layout Standard
37083 The thesaurus is described in section
37084 \begin_inset space ~
37088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37090 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37097 \begin_layout Subsection
37099 \begin_inset Index idx
37102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37109 \begin_inset Index idx
37112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37121 \begin_layout Standard
37122 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37123 the highlighted document part.
37126 \begin_layout Subsection
37131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37139 \begin_inset Index idx
37142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37151 \begin_layout Standard
37152 Generates with the help of the program
37156 a log of possible LaTeX-errors and displays it in a dialog.
37157 This feature is not available on Windows.
37160 \begin_layout Subsection
37165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37173 \begin_inset Index idx
37176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37185 \begin_layout Standard
37186 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your LaTeX-syst
37191 \begin_inset space ~
37196 to see the full filename paths.
37199 \begin_layout Subsection
37201 \begin_inset Index idx
37204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37213 \begin_layout Standard
37214 Opens a dialog to compare LyX files as described in section
37215 \begin_inset space ~
37219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37221 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37228 \begin_layout Subsection
37230 \begin_inset Index idx
37233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37234 LyX ! Reconfigure|see
37238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37245 Reconfiguration of LyX
37249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37262 \begin_inset Index idx
37265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37266 Reconfiguration of LyX
37274 \begin_layout Standard
37275 Reconfigures LyX; that is, LyX looks for LaTeX-packages and programs it
37276 needs; see also section
37277 \begin_inset space ~
37281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37283 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37290 \begin_layout Subsection
37294 \begin_layout Standard
37299 dialog as described in detail in appendix
37300 \begin_inset space ~
37304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37306 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
37313 \begin_layout Section
37315 \begin_inset Index idx
37318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37327 \begin_layout Standard
37328 This menu lists the documentation files of LyX in the language of LyX's
37330 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
37334 \begin_layout Standard
37338 \begin_inset space ~
37343 shows a LyX-document with information about the LaTeX-packages and classes
37344 found by LyX (see also section
37345 \begin_inset space ~
37349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37351 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
37358 \begin_layout Standard
37362 \begin_inset space ~
37369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37378 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the LyX version
37382 \begin_layout Section
37384 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37386 name "sec:Toolbars"
37393 \begin_layout Standard
37394 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
37395 \begin_inset space ~
37399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37401 reference "sub:Toolbars"
37408 \begin_layout Standard
37409 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
37410 This is described in the
37412 Additional Features
37417 \begin_layout Subsection
37419 \begin_inset Index idx
37422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37431 \begin_layout Standard
37432 \begin_inset Graphics
37433 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
37441 \begin_layout Standard
37442 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37448 \begin_layout Standard
37449 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
37454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37466 \begin_inset Note Note
37469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37470 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
37475 manual for more information.
37483 \begin_layout Standard
37484 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37490 \begin_layout Standard
37491 \begin_inset Tabular
37492 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
37493 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37494 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
37495 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
37497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37501 \begin_inset Graphics
37502 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
37512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37516 pull-down box for the environments
37529 \begin_layout Standard
37530 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
37536 \begin_layout Standard
37538 \begin_inset Tabular
37539 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
37540 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37541 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37542 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37543 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37566 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37573 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37596 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37603 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37626 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37633 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37642 arg "dialog-show print"
37650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37656 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37663 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37672 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
37680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37686 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37693 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37716 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37723 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37746 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37753 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37776 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37783 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37806 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37813 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37836 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37843 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37852 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
37860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37866 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37868 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37872 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37876 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37885 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37892 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
37900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37906 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37908 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37912 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37916 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37925 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37934 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
37942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37948 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37949 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37956 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37977 Emphasize text, function of the
37979 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37981 \begin_inset space ~
37984 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37993 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38014 Set text to noun style, function of the
38016 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38018 \begin_inset space ~
38021 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38030 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38039 arg "textstyle-apply"
38047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38051 Format text using the current settings in the
38053 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38055 \begin_inset space ~
38058 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38067 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38090 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38091 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38093 \begin_inset space ~
38102 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38111 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38125 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38132 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38139 arg "tabular-insert"
38147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38153 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38160 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38169 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38181 Toggle outline window on/off,
38183 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38190 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38199 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38211 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38217 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38226 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
38234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38238 Toggle table toolbar on/off
38251 \begin_layout Subsection
38253 \begin_inset Index idx
38256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38265 \begin_layout Standard
38266 \begin_inset Graphics
38267 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
38275 \begin_layout Standard
38276 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38282 \begin_layout Standard
38283 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38287 \begin_layout Standard
38288 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38294 \begin_layout Standard
38295 \begin_inset Tabular
38296 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
38297 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38298 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38299 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38300 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38327 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38336 arg "layout Enumerate"
38344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38354 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38363 arg "layout Itemize"
38371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38381 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38408 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38417 arg "layout Description"
38425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38435 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38444 arg "depth-increment"
38452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38458 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38460 \begin_inset space ~
38464 \begin_inset space ~
38473 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38482 arg "depth-decrement"
38490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38496 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38498 \begin_inset space ~
38502 \begin_inset space ~
38511 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38520 arg "float-insert figure"
38528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38534 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38535 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38542 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38551 arg "float-insert table"
38559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38565 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38566 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38573 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38596 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38603 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38612 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
38620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38626 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38633 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38642 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
38650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38656 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38663 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38686 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38688 \begin_inset space ~
38697 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38706 arg "nomencl-insert"
38714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38720 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38722 \begin_inset space ~
38731 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38740 arg "footnote-insert"
38748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38754 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38761 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38770 arg "marginalnote-insert"
38778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38784 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38786 \begin_inset space ~
38795 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38818 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38819 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38832 \begin_inset space ~
38841 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38850 arg "box-insert Frameless"
38858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38864 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38871 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38894 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38901 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38924 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38941 \begin_inset space ~
38950 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38959 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
38967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38973 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38974 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38981 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38990 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
38998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39004 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39005 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39007 \begin_inset space ~
39016 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39025 arg "dialog-show character"
39033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39039 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39041 \begin_inset space ~
39044 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39051 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39060 arg "layout-paragraph"
39068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39074 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39076 \begin_inset space ~
39085 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39094 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39108 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39122 \begin_layout Subsection
39123 View/Update Toolbar
39124 \begin_inset Index idx
39127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39128 Toolbar ! View / Update
39136 \begin_layout Standard
39137 \begin_inset Graphics
39138 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39145 \begin_layout Standard
39146 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39152 \begin_layout Standard
39153 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39157 \begin_layout Standard
39158 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39164 \begin_layout Standard
39165 \begin_inset Tabular
39166 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39167 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39168 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39169 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39170 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39193 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39200 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39209 arg "buffer-update"
39217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39223 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39230 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39239 arg "master-buffer-view"
39247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39253 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39255 \begin_inset space ~
39264 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39273 arg "master-buffer-update"
39281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39287 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39289 \begin_inset space ~
39293 \begin_inset space ~
39302 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39311 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
39319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39325 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39326 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39327 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39328 Synchronize with Output
39334 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39339 \begin_inset Graphics
39340 filename ../images/view-others.png
39342 groupId toolbarbuttons
39353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39359 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39360 View (Other Formats)
39366 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39371 \begin_inset Graphics
39372 filename ../images/update-others.png
39374 groupId toolbarbuttons
39383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39389 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39390 Update (Other Formats)
39403 \begin_layout Standard
39404 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
39408 \begin_layout Subsection
39412 \begin_layout Standard
39413 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
39414 \begin_inset space ~
39418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39420 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39424 , the table toolbar
39425 \begin_inset Index idx
39428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39437 \begin_inset space ~
39442 manual and the math macro toolbar
39443 \begin_inset Index idx
39446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39459 \begin_layout Chapter
39460 The Document Settings
39461 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39463 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
39468 \begin_inset Index idx
39471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39472 Document ! Settings
39480 \begin_layout Standard
39484 \begin_inset space ~
39489 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
39490 is called with the menu
39492 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39496 You can save your document settings as default with the
39498 Save as Document Defaults
39500 button in any dialog.
39501 This will create a template named
39505 which is automatically loaded by LyX when you create a new document without
39509 \begin_layout Standard
39514 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
39515 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
39518 \begin_layout Standard
39519 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
39522 \begin_layout Section
39526 \begin_layout Standard
39527 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
39529 Document classes are described in section
39530 \begin_inset space ~
39534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39536 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
39544 \begin_layout Standard
39548 \begin_inset space ~
39553 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in LyX's
39557 folder and thus not recognized by LyX as a layout for a document class.
39558 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
39560 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
39569 \begin_layout Standard
39570 Some classes use special class options by default.
39571 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
39575 and you can decide to use them or not.
39576 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
39577 recommended you leave them untouched.
39582 is used for LaTeX's graphics, color and page layout packages.
39587 , the default driver for the LaTeX-packages is used.
39588 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
39593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39594 When you want to use one of the following drivers
39595 \begin_inset Newline newline
39600 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
39603 \begin_inset Newline newline
39606 you first have to activate them in your LaTeX distribution, see section
39612 \begin_inset CommandInset href
39614 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
39626 \begin_layout Standard
39631 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
39632 The master document will be used by LyX in the background if the child
39633 document is opened without its master.
39634 This way child documents are always compilable.
39635 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
39642 \begin_inset space ~
39650 \begin_layout Standard
39651 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the LaTeX-package
39661 \begin_inset Index idx
39664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39665 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
39671 \begin_inset Index idx
39674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39675 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
39680 for cross-references, see section
39681 \begin_inset space ~
39685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39687 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39694 \begin_layout Section
39698 \begin_layout Standard
39699 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
39700 Please refer to the section
39703 \begin_inset space ~
39711 \begin_inset space ~
39716 manual for details.
39719 \begin_layout Section
39723 \begin_layout Standard
39724 Modules are explained in section
39725 \begin_inset space ~
39729 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39731 reference "sub:Modules"
39738 \begin_layout Section
39742 \begin_layout Standard
39744 \begin_inset space ~
39748 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39750 reference "sub:Local-Layout"
39757 \begin_layout Section
39761 \begin_layout Standard
39762 The document font settings are described in section
39763 \begin_inset space ~
39767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39769 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
39776 \begin_layout Section
39780 \begin_layout Standard
39781 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
39793 \begin_inset space ~
39798 and whether it should be a
39801 \begin_inset space ~
39806 can also be specified here.
39809 \begin_layout Standard
39810 Note that LyX will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on
39812 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
39814 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
39817 \begin_layout Section
39821 \begin_layout Standard
39822 This dialog is described in sections
39823 \begin_inset space ~
39827 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39829 reference "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
39834 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39836 reference "sub:Document-Layout"
39843 \begin_layout Section
39847 \begin_layout Standard
39848 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
39849 \begin_inset space ~
39853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39855 reference "sub:Margins"
39862 \begin_layout Section
39864 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39866 name "sec:Language-encodings"
39871 \begin_inset Index idx
39874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39875 Language ! Encoding
39883 \begin_layout Standard
39884 The document language and quote styles are set here.
39885 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to LaTeX (the
39886 LyX file is always encoded in utf8).
39887 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
39888 be exported as LaTeX-commands (this can fail if a LaTeX-command is not
39889 known for a particular character).
39893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39894 The known commands are defined in a text file (
39899 You can add commands for unknown symbols to that file yourself, see the
39904 manual for details.
39912 \begin_layout Standard
39913 If you use the option
39917 , LyX determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
39918 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
39919 than one encoding in the LaTeX file.
39920 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
39921 exactly one encoding.
39922 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
39925 \begin_layout Standard
39926 LyX also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
39927 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
39928 If you want to use this (and your LaTeX installation supports Unicode),
39929 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
39930 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard LaTeX is quite incomplete,
39931 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
39936 (when LyX uses its list of known LaTeX-commands), but does not work with
39937 a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known LaTeX-commands is not used,
39938 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
39939 The situation is much better with XeTeX and LuaTeX, two new alternative
39940 engines to standard LaTeX.
39941 Both engines support Unicode natively.
39942 LyX now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
39945 \begin_inset space ~
39952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39964 \begin_inset space ~
39971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39983 \begin_inset space ~
39989 \begin_inset space ~
39993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39995 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
40000 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40004 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40007 \begin_layout Standard
40011 \begin_inset space ~
40016 determines the LaTeX-package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40026 The possible settings are:
40029 \begin_layout Description
40030 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40032 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40033 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40037 \begin_inset space ~
40041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40043 reference "sub:Prefs-Language"
40050 \begin_layout Description
40051 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40052 format you will use.
40053 In many cases this will be
40058 \begin_inset Index idx
40061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40062 LaTeX-packages ! babel
40068 If the newer package
40073 \begin_inset Index idx
40076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40077 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
40082 is more appropriate (is the case when using XeTeX and/or non-TeX fonts),
40083 this package will be used instead of
40090 \begin_layout Description
40092 \begin_inset space ~
40103 would be more appropriate.
40106 \begin_layout Description
40107 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40108 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40112 (for German texts), type in
40115 \begin_inset Newline newline
40120 usepackage{ngerman}
40123 \begin_layout Description
40124 None will not use a language package.
40125 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40128 \begin_layout Standard
40129 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40132 \begin_layout Description
40134 \begin_inset space ~
40138 \begin_inset space ~
40142 \begin_inset space ~
40149 , but the LaTeX-package
40154 \begin_inset Index idx
40157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40158 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
40164 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40165 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40166 languages in TeX code.
40169 \begin_layout Description
40170 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40171 LyX converts all other characters into LaTeX commands, which may result
40172 in a big file when lots of LaTeX-commands are needed.
40175 \begin_layout Description
40177 \begin_inset space ~
40181 \begin_inset space ~
40184 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40187 \begin_layout Description
40189 \begin_inset space ~
40193 \begin_inset space ~
40196 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40199 \begin_layout Description
40201 \begin_inset space ~
40204 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40207 \begin_layout Description
40209 \begin_inset space ~
40213 \begin_inset space ~
40216 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40217 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
40220 \begin_layout Description
40222 \begin_inset space ~
40226 \begin_inset space ~
40229 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
40233 \begin_layout Description
40235 \begin_inset space ~
40239 \begin_inset space ~
40242 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
40243 ISO-8859-13 encoding
40246 \begin_layout Description
40248 \begin_inset space ~
40252 \begin_inset space ~
40256 \begin_inset space ~
40259 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
40260 \begin_inset space ~
40266 \begin_layout Description
40268 \begin_inset space ~
40272 \begin_inset space ~
40276 \begin_inset space ~
40279 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
40280 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
40283 \begin_layout Description
40285 \begin_inset space ~
40289 \begin_inset space ~
40292 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
40293 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
40294 is not available for LaTeX you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40295 \begin_inset space ~
40299 \begin_inset space ~
40305 \begin_layout Description
40307 \begin_inset space ~
40311 \begin_inset space ~
40314 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
40315 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
40316 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for LaTeX
40317 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40318 \begin_inset space ~
40322 \begin_inset space ~
40328 \begin_layout Description
40330 \begin_inset space ~
40334 \begin_inset space ~
40337 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
40340 \begin_layout Description
40342 \begin_inset space ~
40346 \begin_inset space ~
40349 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
40352 \begin_layout Description
40354 \begin_inset space ~
40358 \begin_inset space ~
40361 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
40364 \begin_layout Description
40366 \begin_inset space ~
40369 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
40372 \begin_layout Description
40374 \begin_inset space ~
40377 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
40380 \begin_layout Description
40382 \begin_inset space ~
40386 \begin_inset space ~
40389 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
40392 \begin_layout Description
40394 \begin_inset space ~
40398 \begin_inset space ~
40404 \begin_layout Description
40406 \begin_inset space ~
40410 \begin_inset space ~
40413 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
40416 \begin_layout Description
40418 \begin_inset space ~
40422 \begin_inset space ~
40428 \begin_layout Description
40430 \begin_inset space ~
40434 \begin_inset space ~
40437 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40442 \begin_inset Index idx
40445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40446 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
40451 , when using this, set the document language to
40456 \begin_layout Description
40458 \begin_inset space ~
40462 \begin_inset space ~
40465 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40469 , when using this, set the document language to
40472 \begin_inset space ~
40478 \begin_layout Description
40480 \begin_inset space ~
40484 \begin_inset space ~
40487 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40492 \begin_inset Index idx
40495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40496 LaTeX-packages ! japanese
40501 , when using this, set the document language to
40506 \begin_layout Description
40508 \begin_inset space ~
40512 \begin_inset space ~
40515 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40519 , when using this, set the document language to
40524 \begin_layout Description
40526 \begin_inset space ~
40530 \begin_inset space ~
40533 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40537 , when using this, set the document language to
40542 \begin_layout Description
40544 \begin_inset space ~
40547 (EUC-KR) for Korean
40550 \begin_layout Description
40552 \begin_inset space ~
40556 \begin_inset space ~
40560 \begin_inset space ~
40563 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
40566 \begin_layout Description
40568 \begin_inset space ~
40572 \begin_inset space ~
40576 \begin_inset space ~
40579 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
40580 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
40581 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
40584 \begin_layout Description
40586 \begin_inset space ~
40590 \begin_inset space ~
40596 \begin_layout Description
40598 \begin_inset space ~
40602 \begin_inset space ~
40605 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
40606 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
40609 \begin_layout Description
40611 \begin_inset space ~
40615 \begin_inset space ~
40618 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the LaTeX-package
40623 \begin_inset Index idx
40626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40627 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
40632 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
40635 \begin_layout Description
40637 \begin_inset space ~
40641 \begin_inset space ~
40644 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
40652 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the LaTeX-package
40657 LyX automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview XeTeX
40659 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
40662 \begin_layout Description
40664 \begin_inset space ~
40668 \begin_inset space ~
40671 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
40676 \begin_inset Index idx
40679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40680 LaTeX-packages ! ucs
40685 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
40688 \begin_layout Description
40690 \begin_inset space ~
40693 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
40698 \begin_inset Index idx
40701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40702 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
40708 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
40712 \begin_layout Description
40714 \begin_inset space ~
40718 \begin_inset space ~
40722 \begin_inset space ~
40725 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
40726 \begin_inset space ~
40732 \begin_layout Description
40734 \begin_inset space ~
40738 \begin_inset space ~
40742 \begin_inset space ~
40745 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
40746 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
40747 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
40751 \begin_layout Description
40753 \begin_inset space ~
40757 \begin_inset space ~
40761 \begin_inset space ~
40764 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
40765 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
40768 \begin_layout Section
40770 \begin_inset Index idx
40773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40780 \begin_inset Index idx
40783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40790 \begin_inset Index idx
40793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40794 Color ! Shaded boxes
40800 \begin_inset Index idx
40803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40804 Color ! Greyed-out notes
40812 \begin_layout Standard
40813 Here you can alter the font color for the
40817 (default: black), for
40820 \begin_inset space ~
40825 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
40829 (default: white) and for
40832 \begin_inset space ~
40842 sets the color back to the default.
40845 \begin_layout Standard
40846 Clicking any button showing
40854 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
40855 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
40856 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
40857 later more quickly.
40860 \begin_layout Standard
40861 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40865 The colors are not shown within LyX, only in the output.
40867 \begin_inset space ~
40870 out note appears blue in the output.)
40878 \begin_layout Standard
40879 Note, if you change the
40882 \begin_inset space ~
40887 font color and use the option
40890 \begin_inset space ~
40895 in the document settings under
40898 \begin_inset space ~
40903 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
40904 \begin_inset space ~
40908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40910 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
40917 \begin_layout Standard
40918 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
40924 \begin_layout Standard
40928 \begin_inset space ~
40937 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
40939 \begin_inset space ~
40942 Code after a forced page break:
40945 \begin_layout Itemize
40946 For the page color:
40947 \begin_inset Newline newline
40954 pagecolor{color name}
40957 \begin_layout Itemize
40958 For the text color:
40959 \begin_inset Newline newline
40969 \begin_layout Standard
40970 You are restricted to one of
41006 unless you have defined your own color (see the
41013 \begin_inset space ~
41019 \begin_inset Newline newline
41022 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41023 names to refer to them:
41026 \begin_layout Itemize
41032 \begin_inset Newline newline
41037 page_backgroundcolor
41040 \begin_layout Itemize
41044 \begin_inset space ~
41050 \begin_inset Newline newline
41058 \begin_layout Itemize
41062 \begin_inset space ~
41068 \begin_inset Newline newline
41076 \begin_layout Itemize
41080 \begin_inset space ~
41086 \begin_inset Newline newline
41094 \begin_layout Standard
41095 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section Colored
41096 \begin_inset space ~
41099 Cells of the Embedded
41100 \begin_inset space ~
41106 \begin_layout Section
41110 \begin_layout Standard
41111 Here you can adjust the
41115 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41119 as described in section
41120 \begin_inset space ~
41124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41126 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
41133 \begin_layout Section
41137 \begin_layout Standard
41138 Here you can specify if a citation style using the LaTeX packages
41143 \begin_inset Index idx
41146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41147 LaTeX-packages ! natbib
41157 \begin_inset Index idx
41160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41161 LaTeX-packages ! jurabib
41169 Sectioned bibliography
41171 using the LaTeX package
41176 \begin_inset Index idx
41179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41180 LaTeX-packages ! bibtopic
41185 and you can select a
41189 for the generation of the bibliography.
41190 For a further description see section
41191 \begin_inset space ~
41195 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41197 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41204 \begin_layout Section
41208 \begin_layout Standard
41209 Here you can define the
41213 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
41215 \begin_inset space ~
41219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41221 reference "sec:Index"
41228 \begin_layout Section
41232 \begin_layout Standard
41233 The PDF properties are explained in section
41234 \begin_inset space ~
41238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41240 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41247 \begin_layout Section
41251 \begin_layout Standard
41252 These options will force LyX to use the LaTeX-packages
41257 \begin_inset Index idx
41260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41261 LaTeX-packages ! amsmath
41271 \begin_inset Index idx
41274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41275 LaTeX-packages ! esint
41285 \begin_inset Index idx
41288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41289 LaTeX-packages ! mathdots
41299 \begin_inset Index idx
41302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41303 LaTeX-packages ! mhchem
41308 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
41311 \begin_layout Description
41312 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas,
41313 ensure that you have enabled
41316 \begin_inset space ~
41324 \begin_layout Description
41325 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
41328 \begin_inset space ~
41340 \begin_layout Description
41341 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
41352 \begin_layout Description
41353 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
41355 Chemical Symbols and Equations
41364 \begin_layout Section
41368 \begin_layout Standard
41369 The float placement options are described in the section
41372 \begin_inset space ~
41380 \begin_inset space ~
41388 \begin_layout Section
41392 \begin_layout Standard
41393 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
41395 Program Code Listings
41400 \begin_inset space ~
41408 \begin_layout Section
41412 \begin_layout Standard
41413 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
41421 set to be used and set the
41426 The itemize environment is described in section
41427 \begin_inset space ~
41431 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41433 reference "sec:Itemize"
41440 \begin_layout Standard
41441 You can furthermore specify a
41444 \begin_inset space ~
41449 by inserting in this field the LaTeX command of the desired character.
41450 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
41457 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
41459 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41463 \begin_inset space \space{}
41467 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
41477 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
41478 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
41481 \begin_layout Standard
41482 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41490 Some characters require to load special LaTeX-packages in the preamble
41493 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41494 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41496 \begin_inset space ~
41502 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
41506 usepackage{textcomp}
41509 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
41513 usepackage{amssymb}
41523 \begin_layout Section
41527 \begin_layout Standard
41528 Branches are described in section
41529 \begin_inset space ~
41533 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41535 reference "sec:Branches"
41542 \begin_layout Section
41544 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41546 name "sec:Doc-Output"
41553 \begin_layout Standard
41554 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
41557 \begin_layout Description
41559 \begin_inset space ~
41563 \begin_inset space ~
41566 Format: The format that is used when you enter
41567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41586 View Master Document
41587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41594 Update Master Document
41595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41602 menu or the toolbar.
41603 The default is set in
41605 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41606 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41608 \begin_inset space ~
41611 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41615 \begin_inset space ~
41619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41621 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41628 \begin_layout Description
41630 \begin_inset space ~
41634 \begin_inset space ~
41637 Output settings for the menu
41639 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41641 \begin_inset space ~
41647 For a detailed description see section
41649 Reverse DVI/PDF search
41654 \begin_inset space ~
41662 \begin_layout Description
41664 \begin_inset space ~
41668 \begin_inset space ~
41671 Options offers settings for the export format
41677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41690 \begin_inset space ~
41695 will assure that the output follows exactly version
41696 \begin_inset space ~
41699 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
41703 \begin_inset space ~
41708 settings are described in detail in section
41710 Math Output in XHTML
41715 \begin_inset space ~
41724 \begin_inset space ~
41728 \begin_inset space ~
41733 is used for the size of equations in the output.
41736 \begin_layout Section
41741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41751 \begin_layout Standard
41752 In this text field you can enter commands to load special LaTeX-packages
41753 or to define LaTeX-commands.
41754 The preamble is a thing for LaTeX-experts.
41755 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
41759 \begin_layout Standard
41760 An introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
41761 \begin_inset space ~
41765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41767 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
41774 \begin_layout Section
41779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41789 \begin_layout Standard
41790 In this text field you can enter commands to load special LaTeX-packages
41791 or to define LaTeX-commands.
41792 The preamble is a thing for LaTeX-experts.
41793 You should not enter commands here until you exactly know what you are
41797 \begin_layout Standard
41798 An introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
41799 \begin_inset space ~
41803 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41805 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
41812 \begin_layout Chapter
41818 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41820 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
41825 \begin_inset Index idx
41828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41837 \begin_layout Standard
41838 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
41840 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41844 It has the following submenus.
41847 \begin_layout Section
41851 \begin_layout Subsection
41855 \begin_layout Subsubsection
41856 User Interface File
41857 \begin_inset Index idx
41860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41861 Customization ! of toolbars
41867 \begin_inset Index idx
41870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41871 Customization ! of menus
41879 \begin_layout Standard
41880 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
41881 interface (ui) file.
41882 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
41890 \begin_layout Description
41895 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
41898 \begin_layout Description
41905 the menu entries in popup context menus
41908 \begin_layout Description
41913 specifies the toolbar buttons
41916 \begin_layout Standard
41917 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
41918 and edit the entries.
41921 \begin_layout Standard
41922 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
41934 entries must be finished with an explicit
41959 and in the case of the
41960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41972 The syntax for the entries is:
41975 \begin_layout Standard
41976 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
41982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42004 \begin_layout Standard
42006 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42009 All the LyX-functions are listed in the menu
42011 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42024 \begin_inset space ~
42032 \begin_layout Standard
42033 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42039 \begin_layout Standard
42040 For example, assuming you use the menu
42042 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42045 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42049 \begin_layout Standard
42050 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42074 \begin_layout Standard
42076 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42091 to have the sixth bookmark.
42094 \begin_layout Standard
42098 \begin_inset space ~
42103 allows you to change the appearance of LyX's toolbar buttons.
42104 The currently available icon sets are compared in
42105 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42108 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
42115 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42119 \begin_layout Standard
42122 Enable tool tips in main work area
42124 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
42128 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42132 \begin_layout Standard
42135 Restore window layouts and geometries
42137 LyX's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used
42138 in the last LyX session.
42141 \begin_layout Standard
42144 Restore cursor positions
42146 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
42150 \begin_layout Standard
42153 Load opened files from last session
42155 opens all files that were opened in the last LyX session.
42158 \begin_layout Standard
42161 Clear all session information
42163 deletes all information from previous LyX sessions (cursor positions, names
42164 of last opened documents, etc.).
42167 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42169 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42171 name "sub:Backup documents"
42176 \begin_inset Index idx
42179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42188 \begin_layout Standard
42191 Backup original documents when saving
42193 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
42194 it was saved the last time.
42195 It is stored in the
42198 \begin_inset space ~
42204 \begin_inset space ~
42208 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42210 reference "sec:Paths"
42214 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
42217 \begin_inset space ~
42223 The backup file has the file extension
42224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42238 \begin_layout Standard
42241 Backup documents, every
42243 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
42246 \begin_layout Standard
42249 Save documents compressed by default
42251 always saves files in a compressed format.
42254 \begin_layout Standard
42259 is the number of last opened files that LyX should display in the menu
42262 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42264 \begin_inset space ~
42272 \begin_layout Standard
42275 Open documents in tabs
42277 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of LyX.
42280 \begin_layout Standard
42285 is only active if a LyXServer pipe
42289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42297 reference "sec:Paths"
42301 for information about LyXServer pipes.
42307 If it is checked, LyX documents will be opened in the same running instance
42309 Otherwise a new LyX instance is created for each file.
42312 \begin_layout Standard
42315 Single close-tab button
42317 is checked, there will only be one close button (
42320 \begin_inset Graphics
42321 filename ../images/closetab.png
42328 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
42329 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
42332 \begin_layout Standard
42333 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42341 For the last option you have to restart LyX before the change takes effect.
42349 \begin_layout Subsection
42351 \begin_inset Index idx
42354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42363 name "sub:Screen-Fonts"
42370 \begin_layout Standard
42371 These fonts are used to display your documents within LyX.
42374 \begin_layout Standard
42375 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42383 This section only deals with the fonts
42388 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
42391 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42392 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42403 \begin_layout Standard
42404 By default, LyX uses
42420 (depends on the system) as its
42423 \begin_inset space ~
42439 \begin_layout Standard
42440 You can change the font size with the
42447 \begin_layout Standard
42452 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
42454 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42457 points have the size of 1
42458 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42462 \begin_inset space ~
42466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42468 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
42473 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
42474 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42478 The sizes are explained in detail in section
42479 \begin_inset space ~
42483 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42485 reference "sub:Document-Font"
42492 \begin_layout Standard
42495 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
42497 enabled, LyX needs to redraw the screen less often.
42498 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
42499 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
42500 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
42502 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
42503 \begin_inset space ~
42509 \begin_layout Subsection
42511 \begin_inset Index idx
42514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42521 \begin_inset Index idx
42524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42533 \begin_layout Standard
42534 Here you can change the screen colors used by LyX by choosing an item in
42535 the list and selecting the
42542 \begin_layout Standard
42543 By checking the option
42547 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
42550 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
42551 \begin_inset space ~
42555 \begin_inset space ~
42560 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
42563 \begin_layout Subsection
42565 \begin_inset Index idx
42568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42577 \begin_layout Standard
42578 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside LyX.
42581 \begin_layout Standard
42586 enables previewing snippets of your document.
42587 This feature is described in section
42588 \begin_inset space ~
42592 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42594 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
42601 \begin_layout Standard
42602 Checking the option
42605 \begin_inset space ~
42609 \begin_inset space ~
42613 \begin_inset space ~
42618 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
42621 \begin_layout Section
42623 \begin_inset Index idx
42626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42635 \begin_layout Subsection
42639 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42643 \begin_layout Standard
42646 Cursor follows scrollbar
42648 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
42652 \begin_layout Standard
42653 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
42654 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
42655 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
42658 \begin_layout Standard
42661 Scroll below end of document
42663 is self-explanatory.
42666 \begin_layout Standard
42667 In LyX one can jump from word to word by pressing
42674 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
42676 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
42677 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
42680 \begin_layout Standard
42683 Sort environments alphabetically
42685 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
42688 \begin_layout Standard
42691 Group environments by their category
42693 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
42696 \begin_layout Standard
42701 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
42712 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42716 \begin_layout Standard
42717 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
42722 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
42723 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
42727 \begin_layout Subsection
42729 \begin_inset Index idx
42732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42739 \begin_inset Index idx
42742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42743 Settings ! Shortcuts
42751 \begin_layout Standard
42756 specifies the file to be used to bind a LyX-function to a key.
42757 Several binding files are available, among them:
42760 \begin_layout Description
42761 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
42764 \begin_layout Description
42765 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
42777 \begin_layout Description
42778 mac.bind a set of bindings for
42781 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42789 \begin_layout Standard
42790 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
42795 , and binding files for special languages.
42796 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
42797 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42801 \begin_inset space \space{}
42805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42813 If you use LyX in a certain language, LyX will try to use the appropriate
42817 \begin_layout Standard
42818 Some binding files, like
42822 , only have a limited scope.
42823 When looking at the end of the file
42827 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
42830 \begin_layout Standard
42834 \begin_inset space ~
42838 \begin_inset space ~
42843 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
42844 in the selected key binding file.
42847 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42849 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42851 name "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
42856 \begin_inset Index idx
42859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42860 Key Bindings ! Editing
42868 \begin_layout Standard
42869 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
42870 the table in the dialog that lists all LyX-functions and the bound shortcuts.
42871 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
42874 Show key-bindings containing
42877 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
42878 Insert there for example as keyword
42879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42886 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
42887 functions that contain
42888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42896 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
42897 All LyX-functions are also listed in the file
42901 that you will find in the
42908 \begin_layout Standard
42909 For example, to add the shortcut
42917 , select the function and press the
42922 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
42923 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
42926 \begin_layout Standard
42927 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
42928 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the LyX
42929 Function definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the
42930 different function names as a semicolon separated list.
42931 LyX will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
42936 \begin_layout Standard
42937 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
42940 \begin_layout Standard
42941 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
42943 The syntax of the entries is:
42946 \begin_layout Standard
42952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42970 \begin_layout Subsection
42972 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42974 name "sub:Keyboard-Map"
42979 \begin_inset Index idx
42982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42989 \begin_inset Index idx
42992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42993 Settings ! Keyboard Map
43001 \begin_layout Standard
43002 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
43003 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, LyX provides keyboard maps.
43004 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
43005 is a Romanian one, you can enable
43008 \begin_inset space ~
43012 \begin_inset space ~
43017 and select the keyboard map file named
43024 \begin_layout Standard
43033 keyboard map and, if you use the
43037 bindings, you can select the first and second with
43040 arg "keymap-primary"
43046 arg "keymap-secondary"
43049 respectively or toggle between them with
43052 arg "keymap-toggle"
43058 \begin_layout Standard
43059 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43067 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
43076 \begin_layout Standard
43077 You can also specify the mouse
43079 Wheel scrolling speed
43082 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
43086 \begin_layout Standard
43094 \begin_inset space ~
43098 \begin_inset space ~
43103 you can select a key for zooming.
43104 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
43107 \begin_layout Subsection
43111 \begin_layout Standard
43112 Input completion is described in section
43113 \begin_inset space ~
43117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43119 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
43126 \begin_layout Section
43128 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43135 \begin_inset Index idx
43138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43145 \begin_inset Index idx
43148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43157 \begin_layout Standard
43158 The paths to the various resources used by LyX are normally determined during
43160 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
43163 \begin_layout Description
43165 \begin_inset space ~
43168 directory This is LyX's working directory.
43169 It is the default when you
43180 \begin_inset space ~
43188 \begin_layout Description
43190 \begin_inset space ~
43193 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
43195 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43197 \begin_inset space ~
43201 \begin_inset space ~
43209 \begin_layout Description
43211 \begin_inset space ~
43214 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
43220 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43224 \begin_inset Newline newline
43228 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43240 button does not exist when using LyX on Mac OS and Windows systems.
43248 \begin_layout Description
43250 \begin_inset space ~
43254 \begin_inset Index idx
43257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43263 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
43264 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
43265 \begin_inset space ~
43269 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43271 reference "sub:Backup documents"
43279 will be used to save the backups.
43280 \begin_inset Newline newline
43283 Backup files have the ending
43284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43294 \begin_layout Description
43299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43307 \begin_inset space ~
43310 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
43311 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to LyX.
43312 \begin_inset Newline newline
43319 You add a BibTeX-database
43324 You can edit this file with the program
43333 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for LyX in its preferences under
43336 \begin_inset space ~
43342 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
43347 and click on the LyX-symbol.
43348 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
43354 and LyX need to be running the same time.
43355 \begin_inset Newline newline
43358 The pipe is also used for the
43363 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43369 reference "sub:Backup documents"
43374 \begin_inset Newline newline
43377 To use the LyXServer-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
43378 \begin_inset Newline newline
43394 \begin_layout Description
43396 \begin_inset space ~
43399 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
43402 \begin_layout Description
43404 \begin_inset space ~
43407 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
43408 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
43409 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
43412 \begin_layout Description
43414 \begin_inset space ~
43417 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
43423 You only need to specify it if you are using
43427 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
43433 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
43437 \begin_layout Description
43439 \begin_inset space ~
43442 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
43443 When LyX needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see
43444 where to find it on the system.
43445 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when LyX
43446 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
43448 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43452 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43455 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
43456 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
43459 \begin_layout Description
43461 \begin_inset space ~
43464 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
43465 which are included in a LyX document via commands in TeX code or in the
43467 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
43469 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
43470 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
43471 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
43472 scanned for the input files.
43473 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
43474 to be relative to the directory of your LyX file.
43475 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
43476 compilation may fail for some documents.
43479 \begin_layout Section
43483 \begin_layout Standard
43484 Here you can insert your
43493 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
43495 \begin_inset space ~
43499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43501 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
43505 , to mark changes you make as yours.
43508 \begin_layout Section
43510 \begin_inset Index idx
43513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43514 Language ! Settings
43520 \begin_inset Index idx
43523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43524 Settings ! Language
43532 \begin_layout Subsection
43534 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43536 name "sub:Prefs-Language"
43543 \begin_layout Description
43545 \begin_inset space ~
43549 \begin_inset space ~
43552 language Here you can select the language for LyX's menus.
43553 You can find its actual translation status here:
43554 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43556 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
43563 \begin_layout Description
43565 \begin_inset space ~
43568 package determines which LaTeX package should be loaded to handle language
43570 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
43571 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
43572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43588 The most widespread language package is
43593 \begin_inset Index idx
43596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43597 LaTeX-packages ! babel
43602 ; it is the default language package in classic LaTeX.
43603 More recent typesetting engines such as XeTeX and LuaTeX come with the
43604 alternative language package
43609 \begin_inset Index idx
43612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43613 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
43618 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
43619 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
43625 The available selections are described in section
43626 \begin_inset space ~
43630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43632 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
43639 \begin_layout Description
43641 \begin_inset space ~
43644 start If a special LaTeX-package is needed to write in a certain document
43645 language, you can here specify the command to start the package.
43646 An example is the start command
43652 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
43657 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
43672 selectlanguage{$$lang}
43677 \begin_layout Description
43679 \begin_inset space ~
43687 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
43688 command toggles the package on and off.
43691 \begin_layout Description
43693 \begin_inset space ~
43697 \begin_inset space ~
43700 Point Define the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
43704 \begin_layout Description
43706 \begin_inset space ~
43710 \begin_inset space ~
43713 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
43714 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
43715 used by all LaTeX-packages.
43716 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
43723 \begin_layout Description
43725 \begin_inset space ~
43728 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
43730 When this option is not set, the
43733 \begin_inset space ~
43738 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the LaTeX-output.
43739 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
43742 \begin_inset space ~
43750 \begin_layout Description
43752 \begin_inset space ~
43758 \begin_inset space ~
43764 When it is not set, the
43767 \begin_inset space ~
43772 is set to the end of the document.
43775 \begin_layout Description
43777 \begin_inset space ~
43781 \begin_inset space ~
43784 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
43785 language will be underlined in blue.
43788 \begin_layout Description
43790 \begin_inset space ~
43794 \begin_inset space ~
43797 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
43798 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
43801 \begin_layout Description
43803 \begin_inset space ~
43806 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
43807 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
43808 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
43809 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
43812 \begin_layout Subsection
43816 \begin_layout Standard
43817 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
43818 \begin_inset space ~
43822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43824 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
43831 \begin_layout Section
43835 \begin_layout Subsection
43839 \begin_layout Description
43841 \begin_inset space ~
43845 \begin_inset space ~
43848 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
43851 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43852 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43854 \begin_inset space ~
43860 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
43863 \begin_layout Description
43865 \begin_inset space ~
43869 \begin_inset Index idx
43872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43879 \begin_inset Index idx
43882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43883 Settings ! Date format
43888 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
43889 \begin_inset Newline newline
43893 \begin_inset Flex URL
43896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43898 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
43904 \begin_inset Newline newline
43907 For example the format
43908 \begin_inset Newline newline
43912 \begin_inset Newline newline
43915 prints the date as day/month/year.
43918 \begin_layout Description
43920 \begin_inset space ~
43924 \begin_inset space ~
43927 export Setting what LyX is allowed to overwrite on export.
43930 \begin_layout Description
43932 \begin_inset space ~
43935 search Commands that will be used for the menu
43937 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43939 \begin_inset space ~
43945 For a detailed description see section
43947 Reverse DVI/PDF search
43952 \begin_inset space ~
43960 \begin_layout Subsection
43962 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43969 \begin_inset Index idx
43972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43979 \begin_inset Index idx
43982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43991 \begin_layout Description
43993 \begin_inset space ~
43996 printer Here you can specify the name of your
44001 The name will be used when the
44006 \begin_inset Newline newline
44010 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44018 You can leave this field empty on Windows systems because it has no effect.
44026 \begin_layout Description
44028 \begin_inset space ~
44031 command is the command LyX
44032 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44036 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44039 LaTeX uses for printing.
44047 \begin_layout Description
44049 \begin_inset space ~
44053 \begin_inset space ~
44056 Options Here you can specify printer options.
44057 A list of printer options with explanations can be found in the documentation
44058 of the program that provides the
44065 \begin_layout Description
44067 \begin_inset space ~
44071 \begin_inset space ~
44075 \begin_inset space ~
44078 printer This option works only for the
44083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44095 It activates a configuration file for dvips.
44096 This is an option only for dvips experts.
44099 \begin_layout Subsection
44104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44112 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44114 name "sub:LaTeX-settings"
44119 \begin_inset Index idx
44122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44131 \begin_layout Description
44133 \begin_inset space ~
44140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44148 \begin_inset space ~
44152 \begin_inset space ~
44155 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
44160 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
44181 are used for Cyrillic.
44182 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
44183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44195 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
44196 LyX sets up in the background.
44197 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
44200 \begin_layout Description
44202 \begin_inset space ~
44206 \begin_inset space ~
44209 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
44214 value depends on your LaTeX-system setup.
44217 \begin_layout Description
44219 \begin_inset space ~
44223 \begin_inset space ~
44227 \begin_inset space ~
44231 \begin_inset space ~
44234 options They only have an effect when the program
44238 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
44241 \begin_layout Standard
44242 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
44243 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
44244 manuals of the applications.
44247 \begin_layout Description
44249 \begin_inset space ~
44252 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
44253 \begin_inset space ~
44257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44259 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
44266 \begin_layout Description
44268 \begin_inset space ~
44271 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
44272 \begin_inset space ~
44276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44278 reference "sub:Index-Program"
44285 \begin_layout Description
44287 \begin_inset space ~
44290 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
44291 \begin_inset space ~
44295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44297 reference "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
44304 \begin_layout Description
44309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44317 \begin_inset space ~
44320 command Command for the program
44324 that is described in the section
44330 Additional Features
44335 \begin_layout Standard
44336 There are additionally the following options:
44339 \begin_layout Description
44341 \begin_inset space ~
44345 \begin_inset space ~
44349 \begin_inset space ~
44353 \begin_inset space ~
44357 \begin_inset space ~
44360 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
44361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44378 to separate folders.
44379 This option is enabled by default when you use LyX on Windows.
44380 \begin_inset Index idx
44383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44390 \begin_inset Index idx
44393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44402 \begin_layout Description
44404 \begin_inset space ~
44408 \begin_inset space ~
44412 \begin_inset space ~
44416 \begin_inset space ~
44420 \begin_inset space ~
44424 \begin_inset space ~
44427 changes Removes all manually set
44433 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44434 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44436 \begin_inset space ~
44441 dialog when changing the document class.
44444 \begin_layout Section
44446 \begin_inset space ~
44450 \begin_inset Index idx
44453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44462 \begin_layout Subsection
44464 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44466 name "sub:Converters"
44471 \begin_inset Index idx
44474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44483 \begin_layout Standard
44484 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
44485 from one format to another.
44486 You can modify converters or create new ones.
44487 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
44494 \begin_inset space ~
44499 field and press the
44504 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
44508 \begin_inset space ~
44513 drop-down list, modify the
44517 field and press the
44524 \begin_layout Standard
44527 Converter File Cache
44533 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
44535 Maximum Age (in days
44538 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
44539 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
44542 \begin_layout Standard
44543 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
44544 definition, is described in the section
44555 \begin_layout Subsection
44557 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44559 name "sec:File-Formats"
44564 \begin_inset Index idx
44567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44574 \begin_inset Index idx
44577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44586 \begin_layout Standard
44587 Here you find the list of defined file formats that LyX can handle.
44596 programs that should be used for certain formats.
44599 \begin_layout Standard
44600 You can also define the
44602 Default output format
44604 that is used when you use
44606 View, Update, View Master Document
44610 Update Master Document
44616 menu or the toolbar.
44619 \begin_layout Standard
44620 More about formats and their options is described in the section
44631 \begin_layout Standard
44632 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in LyX's temporary
44633 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
44634 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
44635 This is done by specifying a
44640 More about this is described in the section
44651 \begin_layout Chapter
44652 Units available in LyX
44653 \begin_inset Index idx
44656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44663 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44665 name "chap:Units-available-in"
44672 \begin_layout Standard
44674 \begin_inset space ~
44678 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44680 reference "tab:Units"
44684 explains all the units available in LyX and used in this documentation.
44687 \begin_layout Standard
44688 \begin_inset Float table
44694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44695 \begin_inset Caption Standard
44697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44698 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44713 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
44719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44721 \begin_inset Tabular
44722 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="2">
44723 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
44724 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44725 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44821 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44825 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44849 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44853 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44876 scaled point (65536
44877 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44881 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44905 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44909 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44933 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44937 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
44941 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44965 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44969 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44992 % of original image width
44999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45181 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45185 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45206 \begin_layout Chapter
45208 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45210 name "chap:Credits"
45217 \begin_layout Standard
45218 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
45219 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
45222 \begin_layout Itemize
45225 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
45228 \begin_layout Itemize
45234 \begin_layout Itemize
45240 \begin_layout Itemize
45246 \begin_layout Itemize
45252 \begin_layout Itemize
45258 \begin_layout Itemize
45264 \begin_layout Itemize
45270 \begin_layout Itemize
45273 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
45276 \begin_layout Itemize
45282 \begin_layout Itemize
45288 \begin_layout Itemize
45294 \begin_layout Itemize
45300 \begin_layout Itemize
45306 \begin_layout Itemize
45312 \begin_layout Itemize
45318 \begin_layout Itemize
45324 \begin_layout Itemize
45326 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
45335 \begin_layout Standard
45336 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
45339 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
45346 \begin_layout Bibliography
45347 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45348 LatexCommand bibitem
45355 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45358 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
45363 \begin_inset Newline newline
45367 \begin_inset Flex URL
45370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45372 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
45380 \begin_layout Bibliography
45381 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45382 LatexCommand bibitem
45383 key "latexcompanion"
45387 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
45389 The LaTeX Companion Second Edition.
45392 Addison-Wesley, 2004
45395 \begin_layout Bibliography
45396 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45397 LatexCommand bibitem
45402 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
45405 A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition.
45408 Addison-Wesley, 2003
45411 \begin_layout Bibliography
45412 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45413 LatexCommand bibitem
45420 LaTeX: A Document Preparation System.
45423 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
45426 \begin_layout Bibliography
45427 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45428 LatexCommand bibitem
45440 Addison-Wesley, 1984
45443 \begin_layout Bibliography
45444 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45445 LatexCommand bibitem
45451 \begin_inset Newline newline
45455 \begin_inset Flex URL
45458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45460 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
45468 \begin_layout Bibliography
45469 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45470 LatexCommand bibitem
45476 \begin_inset Newline newline
45480 \begin_inset Flex URL
45483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45485 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
45493 \begin_layout Bibliography
45494 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45495 LatexCommand bibitem
45501 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45503 name "Documentation"
45504 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
45513 \begin_inset Newline newline
45517 \begin_inset Flex URL
45520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45522 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
45530 \begin_layout Bibliography
45531 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45532 LatexCommand bibitem
45538 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45540 name "Documentation"
45541 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
45545 how to use the program
45550 \begin_inset Newline newline
45554 \begin_inset Flex URL
45557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45559 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
45567 \begin_layout Bibliography
45568 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45569 LatexCommand bibitem
45575 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45577 name "Documentation"
45578 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
45587 \begin_inset Newline newline
45591 \begin_inset Flex URL
45594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45596 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
45604 \begin_layout Bibliography
45605 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45606 LatexCommand bibitem
45612 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45614 name "Documentation"
45615 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
45624 \begin_inset Newline newline
45628 \begin_inset Flex URL
45631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45633 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
45641 \begin_layout Bibliography
45642 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45643 LatexCommand bibitem
45649 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45651 name "Documentation"
45652 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
45656 of the AMS LaTeX-packages:
45657 \begin_inset Newline newline
45661 \begin_inset Flex URL
45664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45666 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
45674 \begin_layout Bibliography
45675 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45676 LatexCommand bibitem
45682 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45684 name "Documentation"
45685 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
45689 of the LaTeX-package
45694 \begin_inset Index idx
45697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45698 LaTeX-packages ! caption
45704 \begin_inset Newline newline
45708 \begin_inset Flex URL
45711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45713 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
45721 \begin_layout Bibliography
45722 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45723 LatexCommand bibitem
45729 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45731 name "Documentation"
45732 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
45736 of the LaTeX-package
45741 \begin_inset Index idx
45744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45745 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
45751 \begin_inset Newline newline
45755 \begin_inset Flex URL
45758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45760 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
45768 \begin_layout Bibliography
45769 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45770 LatexCommand bibitem
45776 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45778 name "Documentation"
45779 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
45783 of the LaTeX-package
45788 \begin_inset Index idx
45791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45792 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
45798 \begin_inset Newline newline
45802 \begin_inset Flex URL
45805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45807 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
45815 \begin_layout Bibliography
45816 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45817 LatexCommand bibitem
45823 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45825 name "Documentation"
45826 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
45830 of the LaTeX-package
45835 \begin_inset Index idx
45838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45839 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
45845 \begin_inset Newline newline
45849 \begin_inset Flex URL
45852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45854 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
45862 \begin_layout Bibliography
45863 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45864 LatexCommand bibitem
45870 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45872 name "Documentation"
45873 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
45877 of the LaTeX-package
45882 \begin_inset Index idx
45885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45886 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
45892 \begin_inset Newline newline
45896 \begin_inset Flex URL
45899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45901 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
45909 \begin_layout Bibliography
45910 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45911 LatexCommand bibitem
45917 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45919 name "Documentation"
45920 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
45924 of the LaTeX-package
45929 \begin_inset Index idx
45932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45933 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
45939 \begin_inset Newline newline
45943 \begin_inset Flex URL
45946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45948 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
45956 \begin_layout Bibliography
45957 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45958 LatexCommand bibitem
45964 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45966 name "Documentation"
45967 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
45971 of the LaTeX-package
45976 \begin_inset Index idx
45979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45980 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
45986 \begin_inset Newline newline
45990 \begin_inset Flex URL
45993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45995 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
46003 \begin_layout Bibliography
46004 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46005 LatexCommand bibitem
46011 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46014 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
46018 how to set up LyX for Arabic:
46019 \begin_inset Newline newline
46023 \begin_inset Flex URL
46026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46028 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
46036 \begin_layout Bibliography
46037 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46038 LatexCommand bibitem
46044 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46047 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
46051 how to set up LyX for Armenian:
46052 \begin_inset Newline newline
46056 \begin_inset Flex URL
46059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46061 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
46069 \begin_layout Bibliography
46070 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46071 LatexCommand bibitem
46077 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46080 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
46084 how to set up LyX for Cyrillic languages:
46085 \begin_inset Newline newline
46089 \begin_inset Flex URL
46092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46094 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
46102 \begin_layout Bibliography
46103 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46104 LatexCommand bibitem
46110 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46113 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
46117 how to set up LyX for Farsi:
46118 \begin_inset Newline newline
46122 \begin_inset Flex URL
46125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46127 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
46135 \begin_layout Bibliography
46136 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46137 LatexCommand bibitem
46143 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46146 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
46150 how to set up LyX for Hebrew:
46151 \begin_inset Newline newline
46155 \begin_inset Flex URL
46158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46160 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
46168 \begin_layout Bibliography
46169 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46170 LatexCommand bibitem
46176 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46179 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
46183 how to set up LyX for Japanese:
46184 \begin_inset Newline newline
46188 \begin_inset Flex URL
46191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46193 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
46201 \begin_layout Bibliography
46202 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46203 LatexCommand bibitem
46209 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46212 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
46216 how to set up LyX for Latvian:
46217 \begin_inset Newline newline
46221 \begin_inset Flex URL
46224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46226 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
46234 \begin_layout Bibliography
46235 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46236 LatexCommand bibitem
46242 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46245 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
46249 how to set up LyX for Lithuanian:
46250 \begin_inset Newline newline
46254 \begin_inset Flex URL
46257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46259 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
46267 \begin_layout Bibliography
46268 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46269 LatexCommand bibitem
46275 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46278 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
46282 how to set up LyX for Mongolian:
46283 \begin_inset Newline newline
46287 \begin_inset Flex URL
46290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46292 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
46300 \begin_layout Bibliography
46301 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46302 LatexCommand bibitem
46308 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46311 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
46315 how to set up LyX for Vietnamese:
46316 \begin_inset Newline newline
46320 \begin_inset Flex URL
46323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46325 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
46333 \begin_layout Bibliography
46334 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46335 LatexCommand bibitem
46341 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46344 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
46348 about new features in
46353 \begin_inset Newline newline
46357 \begin_inset Flex URL
46360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46362 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
46370 \begin_layout Standard
46371 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46405 \begin_inset Note Note
46408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46415 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
46416 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
46417 bibliography is the second one:
46425 \begin_layout Standard
46426 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
46427 LatexCommand bibtex
46428 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
46429 options "biblio/alphadin"
46436 \begin_layout Standard
46437 The above bibliography is created from a BibTeX-database.
46440 \begin_layout Standard
46441 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
46442 LatexCommand printnomenclature
46448 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
46449 LatexCommand printindex